Home

Nissan 2010 Armada Automobile User Manual

1. Select Ringtone Bluetooth Off Use the Setup command to change options as sociated with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System Pair phone Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compat ible phone to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System NOTE The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancelled Also see Pairing procedure earlier in this section for additional information Up to 5 phones can be paired If you try to pair a sixth phone the system announces that you must first delete one phone or replace an existing phone If you try to pair a phone that has already been paired to your vehicle s system the system an nounces the name the phone is already using The pairing procedure will then be cancelled When prompted by the system choose from the following commands New phone Refer to Pairing a phone earlier in this section Replace phone The system announces the names of the phones already paired and asks which you would like to replace Once you say the name of the phone you wish to replace the pairing procedure will begin Refer to Pairing procedure earlier in this section List phone See the description below List phone Use the List Phone command to hear the names of the phones currently paired If no
2. 1 Press the 4 button on the steering wheel The system announces the available commands 2 Say Setup The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands 3 Say Pair phone The system acknowl edges the command and announces the next set of available commands Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 97 4 Say New phone The system acknowl edges the command and asks you to initiate pairing from the phone handset The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instruc tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel lular phones When prompted for a Passkey code enter 1234 from the handset The Passkey code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed 5 The system asks you to say a name for the phone If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name already used the system tells you then prompts you for a name again 6 The system asks you to assign a priority level The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle Follow the instructions provided by the system
3. 2009 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA INC All rights reserved No part of this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Nissan North America Inc NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs However if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions please contact the NISSAN Con sumer Affairs Department using our toll free number For U S customers 1 800 NISSAN 1 1 800 647 7261 For Canadian customers 1 800 387 0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information Your name address and telephone number Vehicle identification number attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver s side Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealer s name Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at For U S customers Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 F
4. 4 124 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Vehicle Information Command if so equipped COMMAND ACTION Traffic Info Turns the traffic information system on and off Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information Trip Computer Displays Trip information Maintenance Displays Maintenance information Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 125 Voice command examples Some basic voice command examples are de scribed here For navigation system commands see the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual Sy Voice Recognition w Phone amp To exit hold the TALK switch Example 1 Placing a call to the phone 2 The system announces Would you like to number 800 662 6200 access Phone Navigation Information or Help 1 Press the 4 switch located on the steering wheel 3 Say Phone 4 126 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Sy Voice Recognition gt Phone us Voice Recognition gt Dial Number us Voice Recognition gt Dial Number u BC o OOO eC Dial Number Da SS CC S Graa Change Number Phonebook a T International Call Say the entire number or groups of numbers Say the next three digits Dial or Say Change Number LSU0018 4 Say Dial Number 5 Say 800 6 The system announces Please say the next three digits or dial or say change number 7 Say
5. This gauge is not designed to indicate low automatic transmission fluid level Use the dipstick to check the fluid level See 5 speed automatic transmission fluid in the Maintenance and do it yourself section If the gauge indicates automatic trans mission fluid temperature over the nor mal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible Have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Contin ued operation of the vehicle may seri ously damage the transmission COMPASS DISPLAY if so equipped This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in dicates the heading direction of the vehicle With the ignition switch in the ON position press the or button as described in the charts below to activate various features of the automatic anti glare rearview mirror Type A Push and hold the D Feature Push button again for about 1 sec button for about ond to change settings Compass display toggles on off Automatic anti glare indicator light 8 seconds toggles on off Compass zone can be changed to 11 seconds h correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode Type B Push and hold Feature the N Push button again for about 1 sec button for about ond to change settings Compass display toggles on off Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode 8 seconds instruments and controls 2 9 For informat
6. While acellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones lf the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide later in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause un desired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interfer
7. 3 6 Automatic door locks 2 ovccssesecnd vce diets odes 3 6 Child safety rear door lock 00ce een e cues 3 7 Remote keyless entry system if so equipped 3 7 How to use remote keyless entry system 3 8 NISSAN Intelligent Key if so equipped 3 12 Operating Tange 262 c2atadpkes carck arkuko ee es 3 14 Door locks unlocks precaution 005 3 14 NISSAN Intelligent Key Operation 3 15 How to use the remote keyless entry MINCUON ons cee eeddeeeedd bactedesanadseases eed 3 17 Warning Signals 5 lt s22ce0 5eGacsetedederwgaed 3 21 Troubleshooting guide 4 223228decteeSeecsdaeer 3 22 Ea o E E TE E TE A E ENE TEE EEE 3 23 BiLe ane ea E TEES T T ETE 3 23 Operating the manual lift gate if so equipped n02cennds cesaeccewawey dees ayes 3 24 Operating the power lift gate if so equipped case ciwesavepedsndeved nrnna 3 24 Cancel SWIG tv ccnsey ergenin newedeweey ERN 3 26 Lift gate release ct vccscewscwaeeeeseareceee sare 3 27 Glass Hatha icowsanadecis bexenngee enegone wees 3 28 Fuel filler door serris sencdn Cncwax seceee wear secs 3 28 Fuel fller cap sasi cxecaeecseeeeiae tabedeneees d 3 28 Steering WHEE cuca dan vaereparhecdagee weno bean 3 30 TE OP Cr Oea a ceeds ee ERE oe 3 30 Pedal position adjustment 000 cece eee eee 3 30 DUN VicOloxngiscrouste E E TETE nese 3 31 Vanily MUN OVS ciucuesucseeseeccwe shendeeuyer lt 3 31 WMIROIS secucesease oe oe
8. 3 17 Troubleshooting guide 3 22 Warning signals aaa aaa 3 22 INGHORNGNY 6 aa sspe ea ode ee oa ws 2 55 ISOFIX child restraints 1 34 J Jump starting 3 2 06 eee ee ed hoe Se 6 8 K Key y cana ee eo ee ee ee Se 3 2 Keyfob battery replacement 8 25 Keyless entry With Intelligent Key system See Intelligent Key system 3 17 Keyless entry system See remote keyless entry system 3 7 L Labels Air conditioner specification label 9 12 C M V S S certification label 9 11 Emission control information label 9 11 Engine serialnumber 9 11 F M V S S certification label 9 11 Tire and Loading Information label 9 12 Vehicle identification number VIN Didtes aie 4 64 oo fo ee Eee we 9 10 Warning labels for SRS 1 67 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren OVS 2 ke eGo ee eh Be ee eye 1 34 License plate Installing the license plate 9 12 LGR GALS s aes oe ee 3 23 Lift gaterelease 044 3 27 Light Air bag warning light aaa aa 1 68 2 18 Brake light See stop light 8 30 Bulb check instrument panel 2 13 Bulb replacement 8 30 Charge warning light 2 15 FOG MONE switeh lt s e sass asada 2 33 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 30 Headlight control switch 2 30 Headlights 5 wu a2 a eo oe ek a 8 28 Interiorlight
9. Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artist s name Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur rently playing Track displays the name of the song on the CD currently playing Some of this text or modes might not display while playing a regular CD Press the BACK button to exit the CD text display screen PAUSE MUTE button To mute or pause the audio sound press the PAUSE MUTE button Press the PAUSE MUTE button again to resume the audio sound FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM SAT band select Pressing the RADIO AM FM button will change the band as follows AM lt FM or SAT satellite if so equipped When the RADIO AM FM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON When the RADIO AM FM button is pressed the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO AM FM button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 49 The F
10. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed When backing up hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go Make small corrections and back up slowly If possible have someone guide you when you are backing up Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking Parking on a slope is not recommended however if you must do so A CAUTION If you move the shift selector to the P Park position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake transmission damage could occur 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels After the wheel blocks are in place slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab sorb the vehicle load 4 Apply the parking brake Shift the transmission into P Park Make sure the olb indicator light if so equipped indicates the transfer case is in 4H 4L or 2H and that the ATP light is off If the cep indicator light is flashing or the ATP light is ON make sure the transmission is in P Park AT and turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H See Automatic transmission park warning light in the Instruments and controls section and Using four wheel drive 4WD in the Starting and driving section 7 Turn off the engine To drive away 1 Start the
11. Display off Select the Display ON key The indicator of the Display ON turns amber and the message above will be displayed briefly When the audio HVAC Heater and air conditioner or any mode button on the control panel is operated the dis play turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons is pressed the display will not automatically turn off until that operation is finished Otherwise the screen turns off auto matically after 5 seconds To turn the screen on Press the SETTING button and select the Display key and then select the Display ON key Then set the screen to on by press ing the ENTER button or Hold the 2 OFF button for approxi mately 2 seconds and the message resum ing display will appear and the Display ON key will be automatically turned on no am ber indicator Background color Select the Background Color key the display color changes between day and night The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Settings gt Beeps Button Beeps Beep when a button is pushed Beeps settings Select the Beeps key and press the ENTER button The Beeps settings screen will appear With this option on indicator light illuminated a beep will sound if any control panel button is pressed Settings gt Clock 12 00 ee On screen Clock
12. NOTE The system will not redial the last number dialed by the handset keypad The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 99 If a redial number does not exist the system announces There is no number to redial and ends the VR session Call back Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a call back number does not exist the system announces There is no number to call back and ends the VR session International For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters please say international When the system acknowledges the command the system will prompt you to speak the number During a call During a call there are several command options available Press the fa button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com mands Help The system announces the avail able commands Go back Correction The system an nounces Go back ends the VR session and returns to the call Cancel Quit The system announces Cancel ends the VR session and returns to the call Send Enter Call Dial Use the Send command to enter numbers or during a call For example if you were
13. PP SKIP key to skip the chapter s of the disc forward The chapters will advance the number of times the PPI SKIP key is touched Touch and hold the P gt SKIP key for more than 1 5 seconds to fast forward the disc When the PP SKIP key is released the disc will be played normally To skip the chapter s forward it is also possible to press the PPI button on the keypad of the remote controller dq SKIP rewind key Touch the M4 SKIP key to skip the chapter s of the disc backward The chapters will go back the number of times the 44 SKIP key is touched Touch and hold the M4 SKIP key for more than 1 5 seconds to rewind the disc When the Ma SKIP key is released the disc will be played normally To skip the chapter s backward it is also pos sible to press the M4 button on the keypad of the remote controller Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 83 DVD gt Settings Switch to DVD AUX DVD settings Touch the Settings key to adjust the following settings while playing a DVD When all the changes have been made press BACK button to save all the settings DVD gt Settings A Display Mode Qs Angle Mark 10Key Search Title Search NOTE If the display in your vehicle is not touch screen enabled use the NISSAN controller and the ENTER button to operate the fol lowing functions For more info
14. Say six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor mance NOTE When speaking a house number speak the number 0 as zero or oh If the letter O is included in the house number it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero Settings menu The content of the Settings Menu differs when the system is in the Alternate Command Mode Command List Displays the command list for Alternate Com mand Mode User Guide The user guide provides basic instructions for using Voice Recognition and accessing some voice commands NOTE The user guide can also be accessed from within the INFO menu after pressing the INFO button Speaker Adaptation Starts a system training procedure to learn the specific sounds of your voice See Speaker ad aptation function later in this section Alternate Command Mode For advanced operation an Alternate Command Mode is provided This setting enables control of the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi tion to additional commands for the Phone and Navigation systems With this setting active the system does not announce or display the avail able commands at each step When this mode is activated the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options Minimize Voice Feedback Reduces the amount of the information spoken for each voice instruction
15. Shift back and forth between R Reverse and D Drive Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH 55 km h 5 If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior ss ann ca nakneey a eewrdnde ay ees aren 7 2 PPTeSneCne Sin5 lt 4ucnseavernens Voda ru renidi uses 7 4 NVOGUING EEE E E E E s 7 2 POO Wale yas E E mee deen E E EE E 7 4 WANING a ep eeeacdamon Pen enieenee rie aeeues bin 2 eal Velie arcu stent dates eeeernecaeaeaynees es 7 5 REMOVING SPOS wcciaehesomats paseas nyoga ias 7 3 Corrosion PrOleClONicscs ccccdesdrcesnten tenana 7 5 WNGCIDOOY sospes reitit weed iniia ea ceeuawas 7 3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle GAES araen a ea a d 3 CONOSION sacar sade E E 7 5 Aluminum alloy wheels 00 0005 7 3 Environmental factors influence the rate of COME PANS E acta eeeeed menses 7 3 CONOS IOWceecesesncdbsouasusetueeueskannsee eee 7 5 Tire Ghess0e acca tenn poets aot A 7 3 To protect your vehicle from corrosion 7 6 Cleaning MCI 2660 ap bene cent aes at cas ee nena ma 7 4 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve hicle it is important to take proper care of it To protect the paint surfaces please wash your vehicle as so
16. e Do not substitute engine anti freeze coolant for window washer solution This may result in damage to the paint Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water BATTERY Keep the battery surface clean and dry Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened lf the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge AWARNING Do not expose the battery to flames an electrical spark or a cigarette Hydro gen gas generated by the battery is ex plosive Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury After touch ing a battery or battery cap do not touch or rub your eyes Thoroughly wash your hands If the acid contacts your eyes skin or clothing immediately flush with water for at least 15 minu
17. ol 32 Climate controls P 4 36 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own Power outlet P 2 38 er s Manual if so equipped Heated seat switch if so equipped See the page number indicated in paren P 2 35 theses for operating details Vehicle dynamic control VDC OFF switch P 2 36 Tow mode switch P 2 38 Shift selector P 5 13 Heated steering wheel if so equipped P 2 35 Center stack storage P 2 40 Power outlet P 2 38 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 62 Auxiliary jack P 4 53 AWD shift switch if so equipped P 5 21 Tilt steering wheel control P 3 30 Rear or front and rear sonar system off switch if so equipped P 2 37 Pedal position adjustment switch P 3 30 Power vent window if so equipped P 2 58 Lift gate open close switch if so equipped P 3 23 Illustrated table of contents 0 7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS ss pm ee H 0 8 Illustrated table of contents Battery P 8 13 Fuse fusible link box P 8 22 Transmission dipstick P 8 11 Engine oil filler cap P 8 8 Brake fluid reservoir P 8 12 Windshield washer fluid reservoir P 8 13 Air cleaner P 8 17 Drive belt location P 8 16 Radiator cap P 8 7 Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 11 Engine oil dipstick P 8 8 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 7 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details
18. 1587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used However most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow Several types of braking systems are available Surge Brakes The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers In this type of system there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer Electric Trailer Brakes Electric braking sys tems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller special brake sensing module If electric trailer brakes are used see Electric trailer brake controller in this section Have a professional supplier of towing equip ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing 9 24 Technical and consumer information AWARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di rectly to the vehicle brake system LT10117 example Electric trailer brake controller Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer bra
19. Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION size if so equipped PNEU ET INFORMATION DE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL FRONT REAR OA swoneoereaces tome X man X aiie THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XX kg OR XX lbs LE POIDS COMBINE D OCCUPANTS ET DE CARGAISON NE DEVRAIT JAMAIS EXC DER XX ok OU XX Ibs ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE TAILLE DU PNEU D ORIGINE PRESSION DE GONFLAGE A FRO1U Suuueenaneermepsrennes PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI INFORMATION POUR D AUTRES PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI Wanka SPARE TIRE AU MANUEL DU 6 rt DE SECOURS PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI CONDUCTEUR Tire and loading information label 4 Cold tire pressure Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 Q Seating capacity The maximum num ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle 2 Vehicle load limit See loading infor km at moderate speeds The recom mation in the Technical and con mended cold tire inflation is set by the sumer information section manufacturer to provide the best bal 3 Original tire size The size of the tires ance OL ie Weal vehicle handling driveability tire noise etc up to the originally insta
20. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle trailer handling possibly caus ing vehicle sway When being passed by larger vehicles be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve hicle handling Do the following if the trailer begins to sway 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow This combination will help stabilize the ve hicle Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes When the trailer sway stops gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road ina safe area Technical and consumer information 9 27 3 Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal anced as described earlier in this section Be careful when passing other vehicles Passing while towing a trailer requires con siderably more distance than normal pass ing Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans mission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently This could cause the brakes to overheat resulting in reduced braking efficiency Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trail
21. Settings gt Voice Recognition B Command List Pfuwe EI Speaker Adaptation H E Alternate Command Mode HI Minimize Voice Feedback SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION The Voice Recognition system has a function to learn the user s voice for better voice recognition performance The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons Having the system learn the user s voice 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel highlight the Others key on the display and then press the ENTER button 2 Highlight the Voice Recognition key and then press the ENTER button 3 Highlight the Speaker Adaptation key and then press the ENTER button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 139 G5 Settings gt Speaker Adaptation Settings gt Speaker Adaptation y yooo on ioo E Seting B E 0 useri Z Navigation i A E ao G EI Vehicle O O 7 fe ere iE Efe vers T Learning results can be stored deleted edited 4 Select the user whose voice is to be memo 5 Select a category to be learned by the sys rized by the system and press the ENTER tem from the following list and then press the button ENTER button Navigation Audio Phone Vehicle Info Others The voice commands in the category are displayed 6 Select a voice command to train and then press the ENTER button The Voice Recognition system starts 4 140 Monitor climate audio phone and v
22. phonebook the system will ask if you want to add a voicetag for it The voicetag screen will be displayed i Enter Data by Keypad Dull 8 OT gt Settings gt Phonebook Copy from Downloaded Phonebook Copy from Outgoing Cali Logs Copy from Incoming Call Logs Transfer via Bluetooth X hey ETE TE N insti If you want to add a voicetag select the Yes key and press the ENTER button For ex ample if the person s name is David speak David while the Store voicetag screen is on the display The David voicetag is stored in the phonebook Voicetag is a useful func tion for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recognition system For more information see NISSAN Voice Recognition System if so equipped later in this section When the phonebook download is com pleted the screen will return to the name list of the phonebook Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 111 Settings gt Transfer via Bluetooth Yilll Add a voicetag There are different methods to input a phone number Select one of the following options for Step 4 above Enter Data by Keypad Input the name and phone number manually us ing the keypad displayed on the screen For in formation on how to use the touch screen see How to use the touch screen earlier in this section Copy from Downloaded Phonebook Copy a phonebook from the Bluetooth cellular phone The availability of th
23. section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section 6 2 Incase of emergency AWARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CHAN
24. 2 05 4 86 Care and maintenance cee ee eee eens 4 88 How to handle the DVD 00000 eee 4 89 Car phone or CB WadlOscervses sc ceneceasecerde snes 4 92 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System without Navigation System if so equipped 05 4 99 Regulatory Information 02 005 4 94 USING ING systemi d2c5cuddvteutensswndceenseane 4 94 Control DUIONS wscectcteeuseserieatsaaweracate 4 96 Getting started ss nananana 4 97 List of voice Commands 00 scenes 4 99 Speaker adaptation SA mode 005 4 104 Troubleshooting guide lt vovecivovenetcenecawes 4 106 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System if so equipped 4 107 Regulatory Information s s s sssusa cece eens 4 109 VOICE COMMANOS 6 yerzceyeccans eeateavetrmte ees 4 109 Pairing procedure 2240 0 e ceeusaduene sete ee ded 4 109 PHC OOOK lt 0ckteesgeeutenenntyeeeresntene eae 4 111 Making a Callecsue 04oudcnesnue se woeeteasseeece 4 112 Receiving 4 Call o2san00n22Giesemeneessegeuaes 4 113 Durma Call erresetan E e a 4 114 Ending A Gall c cec ece0ue anika dininin ineat 4 115 Phone Seting eessiccrs ai enkaa a Ei 4 115 Call volame 2 ncteecwradeeaett cee eaten kecues 4 117 NISSAN Voice Recognition System fso COUIDDeO ences canuntemseuesaneeeusauee ase 4 118 NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode 4 118 USING the SYSIGMs vcs sevcecae dy deeoetereeeets 4 121 Before Sta
25. FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you under stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles kilome ters of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov ering your vehicle The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve hicle Additionally a separate Customer Care Lemon Law Booklet U S only will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Owner s Manual carefully This will ensure famil larity with controls and maintenance require ments assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle AWARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE MINDERS FOR SAFETY Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers e NEVER drive under the
26. If wheels or tires other than the recom mended ones are used the Vehicle Dy namic Control system may not operate properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con trol off indicator light may come on The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road REAR SONAR SYSTEM AWARNING Always turn and look back before back ing up The RSS is not a substitute for proper backing procedures Read and understand the limitations of the rear sonar system as contained in this section Inclement weather may af fect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects Starting and driving 5 31 The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it mis aligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measure ment of obstacles or false alarms The Rear Sonar System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the shift selector is in R Reverse The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular
27. Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child s arm A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap shoulder belt Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers When selecting any booster seat keep the following points in mind Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system 1 50 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Make sure the child s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat The seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears For example if a low back booster seat 1 is chosen the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears If the seatback is lower than the center of the child s ears a high back booster seat 2 should be used If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child Always follow all recommended pro cedures All U
28. ON Normal operating position 3 This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories Starting and driving 5 11 START 4 This position starts the engine As soon as the engine has started release the key It automati cally returns to the ON position NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following procedure 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN recom mends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices 5 12 Starting and driving BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear Check fluid levels such as engine oil cool ant brake fluid and window washer fluid as frequently as possible or at least whenever you refuel Check that all windows and lights are cl
29. Rapid air pressure loss or a blow out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under inflated tires Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle especially at highway speeds Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage See Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows out while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the ve hicle road and traffic AWARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire e Do not rapidly apply the brakes Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal e Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel 1 Remain calm and do not over react 2 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 3 When appropriate slowly release the accel erato
30. Title Text Priority Set the priority to CDDB Compact Disc Data Base to acquire track information from the Gracenote Database or set to CD TEXT to acquire the information from CDs e Delete ALL Music Box Data Delete all music data stored on the hard disk Gracenote NOTE The information contained in the Gracenote Database is not fully guaran teed The service of the Gracenote Database on the Internet may be stopped without prior notice for maintenance gracenote _ End User License Agreement USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW Gracenote MusicID Terms of Use This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Soft ware enables this application to do online disc identification and obtain music related informa tion including name artist track and title infor mation Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other func tions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device 4 70 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third pa
31. Top tether anchor for installation instructions 2nd row bench if so equipped on the floor When installing a child restraint carefully read tether strap may damage it during a ne ai behind the outboard seating positions as and follow the instructions in this manual and collision A child could be seriously in TONN those supplied with the child restraint jured or killed in a collision if the top l tether strap is damaged 2nd row captain s chairs if so equipped on the floor behind the seats as shown 3rd row bench seat on the floor of the cargo area behind the center seat position as shown Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 37 Wes LRS0361 LRS0640 WRS0801 2nd row bench seat if so equipped 3rd row bench seat Rear facing web mounted step 2 REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach INSTALLATION USING LATCH ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child erly attached to the lower anchors Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions 1 38 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint sy
32. WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS Anti lock Braking System ABS warn ing light Automatic transmis sion check warning light Automatic transmis sion park warning light Ezy model Brake warning light Charge warning 2 15 light Check suspension warning light if so equipped Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 4WD warning light 9 16 ESTI model Low fuel warning 9 16 light l Low tire pressure 9 16 warning light Master warning light 9 18 Ka Seat belt warning 2 18 an light and chime ee air ag warning light Indicator Name Page light ry Front passenger air 2 bag status light High beam indicator light Blue mies Malfunction indica SOON tor light MIL Security indicator 2 19 light SLIP Slip indicator light Turn signal hazard 2 20 indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light Illustrated table of contents 0 9 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Deals surcctadnsdeennacnsuiusceseondeanseseusanetns 1 2 Cid SAC ion ecu ses E E E E aes Front manual seat adjustment Wat AUS aceon e ctanevn 0 bie edie ew ere es pate eh ode if so equipped for passenger s seat 1 2 Siall ohid esne srera iE nka Front power seat adjustment for driver s Largor GhidreNs acc daca nuras ir aE seat and if so equipped for passenger s Ghildtesirinis a a rs Precautions on child restraints 0 0060
33. a PAIRING PROCEDURE 1 Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel or the f4 switch on the steering wheel and select the Pair phone key on the display using the NISSAN controller Then press the ENTER button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 109 NOTE If a phone is already paired with the sys tem Step 1 will not work To pair another phone press the SETTING button then se lect the Phone key and press the ENTER button Scroll to the bottom of the list and select the Bluetooth Setup key and press the ENTER button Select the Pair Phone key and press the ENTER button then fol low the instructions in Step 2 Settings gt Pair Phone 1 None Add New 2 None Add New 3 None Add New 4 None Add New 5 None Add New 2 Select the None Add New key from the name list of the phones and press the EN TER button 4 110 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Pair Phone Please have your phone look for a device called MY CAR When the phone connects to MY CAR a PIN will be requested Please enter 1234 Exiting this screen will cancel pairing Cancel 3 When a PIN code appears on the screen operate the Bluetooth cellular phone to enter the PIN code The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for de
34. section of this manual Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident check for the cause and have it corrected imme diately Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold with the engine off Check the lines for proper attachment leaks cracks etc Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt insects leaves etc that may have accumulated Make sure the hoses have no cracks deformation rot or loose connections Underbody The underbody is frequently ex posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody otherwise rust may form on the floor pan frame fuel lines and exhaust system At the end of winter the underbody should be thor oughly flushed with plain water in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated See the Appearance and care section of this manual Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following are general
35. tails You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on pairing recommended cellu lar phones When the pairing is complete the screen will return to the Bluetooth setup display Settings gt Phone amp S c S U Lea 8 Phonebook Downloaded Phonebook Automatic Hold Use Vehicle Ringtone Delete Call Logs A e 1 6 i Add or edit phonebook entries PHONEBOOK Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the phonebook 1 Press the SETTING button then select the Phone key and press the ENTER button Select the Phonebook key and press the ENTER button Select one of the None Add New keys from the name list of the phonebook and press the ENTER button Select the Transfer via Bluetooth key in order to transfer a phonebook entry from mor aa woh a 1 None Add New Vil 8 00 Gao Voicetag Directory 2 None Add New 3 None Add New 4 None Add New 6 Naty TE TE i i Select location to store phone number your cellular phone to your phonebook in your Car Operate the cellular phone to send a per son s name and phone number from the memory of the cellular phone The memory sending procedure from the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone manufacturer See the cellular phone own er s manual for more details After the download is registered in the
36. 50 50 4WD This results in improved driving stability If the 4WD shift switch is operated while making a turn accelerating or decelerating or if the ignition switch is turned off while in the AUTO 4H or 4LO you may feel a jolt This is not abnormal When the vehicle is stopped after mak ing a turn you may feel a slight jolt after the shift selector is shifted to N or P This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a malfunction A CAUTION When driving straight shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD AUTO or 4H position Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while driving on steep downhill grades Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears D1 or D2 for en gine braking Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the rear wheels spinning Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H position from 2WD or AUTO ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH 100 km h Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system Never shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 4LO and 4H while driving Engine idling speed is high while warm ing up the engine Be especially careful when starting or driving on slippery sur faces with the 4WD shift switch set in AUTO 4WD shift indicator light LSD0147 The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the vehicle information display The light should turn off within 1 sec
37. FAT16 FAT32 MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 5 Sampling frequency CTN 8 kHz 48 kHz Supported Bitrate rate 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 versions 1 WMA 2 WMA7 WMA8 WMAQ Sampling ae 32 kHz 48 kHz Bitrate o rate 32 kbps 192 kbps VBR 4 ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 VER 2 4 MP3 only Tag information WMA tag WMA only With navigation system Folder levels 8 Folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder Without navigation system Folder levels 8 Folders and files 999 Max 255 files for one folder ieee With navigation system 128 characters Text character number limitation bee cred Without navigation system 64 characters 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian 05 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian Folder levels Displayable character codes 3 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 3 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed 4 When VBR files are played the playback time may not be displayed correctly 4 44 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Troubleshooting guide C T Check if there is condensation inside the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before usi
38. For example press the lt button then say Phonebook New entry rather than Phonebook Wait for the voice feedback prompt then say New entry How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the following rules and examples Either zero or oh can be used for 0 Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh or One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred and NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 95 Numbers can be spoken in small groups See List of voice commands and Interna The system will prompt you to continue en tional later in this section for more informa tering digits if desired tion Example 1 800 662 6200 Example 1 555 1212 123 One five five five one two one two star One eight zero zero one two three The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more NOTE six six two For best results say phone numbers as The system repeats the numbers and single digits prompts you to enter more The voice command Help is avail
39. Operation is subject to the following two mN conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device 1 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 2 Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part Use a cloth to protect the casing 3 Replace the battery with a new one Recommended battery CR2025 or equiva lent Do not touch the internal circuit and elec tric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction Hold the battery by the edges Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity Make sure that the side faces the bot tom of the case Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 4 Close the lid securely as illustrated 5 Operate the buttons to check the operation See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 th
40. P 4 26 8 VOICE button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 17 HOW TO USE THE NISSAN CONTROLLER Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on the display screen Select an item on the display using the main directional buttons certain Navigation System functions use the additional directional buttons or the center dial Then press the ENTER button C to select the item or perform the action The BACK button 4 has two functions e Go back to the previous display cancel If you press the BACK button during setup the setup will be canceled and or the display will return to the previous screen Finish setup In some screens pressing the BACK button accepts the changes made during setup For the VOICE button functions refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual HOW TO USE THE TOUCH SCREEN A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water To clean the display never use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel 4 18 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e Do not
41. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alter nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 5 4 Starting and driving Additional information e The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted in all 4 tires After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi nate If the warning light illuminates in low ambient tempera
42. The high beam lights come on and the 20 light illuminates 2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam 3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off Battery saver system If the ignition switch Is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the D gt d position the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes 2 32 or 2 instruments and controls After the headlights automatically turn off with the headlight switch in the PG or 2 position the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position and then turned to the P4 or 2 position A CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time you should turn the head light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM Canada only The headlights automatically illuminate at a re duced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the gt 4 position Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime running lights do not illumi nate The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is rele
43. Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the system also displays pres sure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not de tect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving For more details refer to Low tire pres sure warning light in the Instruments and controls section Tire pressure informa tion in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving sec tion and Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures including the spare often and always prior to long dis tance trips The recommended tire pres sure specifications are shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar Tire pressures sho
44. User Guide key using the button ee NISSAN controller and press the ENTER 3 Highlight the Voice Recognition key using button the NISSAN controll d the ENTER a 0 0C C C lt SCT 5 Highlight an item using the NISSAN control ler and press the ENTER button Available items Getting Started Describes the basics of how to operate the Voice Recognition system Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 119 Information gt User Guide Using Voice Recognition With voice recognition you can use voice commands to control navigation audio phone and other functions To start the voice recognition system push the TALK switch on the steering wheel Then say a command after the tone 1 7 LSU0014 Getting started Before using the Voice Recognition system for the first time you can confirm how to use com mands by viewing the Getting Started section of the User Guide 1 Highlight Getting Started and press the ENTER button 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec ognition system If you choose Finding a Street Address or Placing Calls you can view tutorials on how to perform these operations using Voice Recogni tion 4 120 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Information gt User Guide Tips on Speaking Commands ssid on Speaking Com
45. When a DVD is loaded it will be replayed auto matically The operation screen will be turned on when the DISC AUX button located on the instrument panel is pressed while a DVD is being played and it will turn off automatically after a period of time To turn it on again press the DISC AUX button once more DVD operation keys To operate the DVD drive touch the preferred key if so equipped or select the preferred key dis played on the operation screen using the NISSAN controller NOTE If the display in your vehicle is not touch screen enabled use the NISSAN controller and the ENTER button to operate the fol lowing functions For more information on how to operate the NISSAN controller see How to use the NISSAN controller earlier in this section EE PAUSE key Touch the II PAUSE key to pause the DVD To resume playing the DVD touch the gt PLAY key To pause the DVD it is also possible to press the Il button on the keypad of the remote controller gt PLAY key Touch the gt PLAY key to start playing the DVD for example after pausing the DVD To start playing the DVD it is also possible to press the P button on the keypad of the re mote controller E STOP key Touch the E STOP key to stop playing the DVD To stop playing the DVD it is also possible to press the W button on the keypad of the remote controller Pl SKIP forward key Touch the
46. button Finding a Street Address 3 Highlight the Voice Recognition key using Tutorial for Finding a Street Address the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button 4 136 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation Help on Speaking Displays useful tips for how to correctly speak commands in order for them to be properly recognized by the system Voice Recognition Settings Describes the available Voice Recognition settings Adapting the System to Your Voice Tutorial for adapting the system to your voice USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the amp switch is pressed before the initializa tion completes the display will show the mes sage Phonetic data downloaded Please wait or a beep sounds Before starting To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice Recognition observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands cor rectly When the climate control is in the AUTO mode the fan speed decreases automati cally f
47. cally downshifts when driving down a grade with a trailer or heavy load to help control vehicle speed Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer load or light trailer light load will not cause any damage However fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission engine driving characteristics may feel unusual When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quently For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle such as a motor home A CAUTION Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage Whenever flat towing your vehicle al ways tow forward never backward e DO NOT tow any automatic transmis sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground flat towing Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual Automatic Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle s drive wheels Always follow the do
48. cee dewa no eeemaed sen ocd 5 27 Power steering eic xediicedeeeneet deetatdersecseas 5 28 Brake SVSiemlicctenceuree veer ousunersen samindu niri 5 28 Brake precautions 00 cee eee eee eee 5 28 Anti lock Braking System ABS 0055 5 29 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system 5 30 Rear sonar system 0 00 c eee eee eee 5 31 Front sonar system if so equipped 05 5 32 Cold weather GLiViING lt c4 a lt s0rodaweenned eee ween wows 5 33 Freeing a frozen door lock 00 eee eee 5 33 Anti freeze oc cc cs ces cctsieee be Jeet ebadane eras 5 33 Ba sates eese de see e eee eee eee sees ees ee ee 5 33 Draining of coolant water 00 eee eee 5 33 Tire equipment 42 cosasuies bot tesa eenseree sees ee 5 34 Special winter equipment 2 000 00 5 34 Driving On SNOW OF IGS 226 vetrecup eee st ancglindace 5 34 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING AWARNING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not plac
49. color and contrast select each key using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left Press the BACK button to apply the settings and return to the previous display WIDE STANDARD PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC DVD With the DVD player you can hear DVD videos video CDs and CDs using headphones Passen gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde pendently of the front seat Press the DISC AUX button located on the front controls to hear the sound of the DVD play through the speakers Press the REAR CTRL button located on the front controls to disable or enable rear seat audio controls For more information on rear seat audio controls see Rear Audio Controls earlier in this section 4 82 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Pressing the button on the front controls turns the rear speakers on or off and enables or disables the wireless headphones It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote control Headphones are a wireless type and no cables are necessary You can use them in almost all the ranges in the rear seat It is not possible to use the headphones in the front seat DISC AUX button Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while watching the images Press the DISC AUX button on the instrument panel and turn the display to the DVD mode
50. dealer immediately A CAUTION e Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will bypass the variable control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Refer to Variable voltage control system in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section later in this manual Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose broken or missing bone Check suspension warning light if so equipped This light may indicate a malfunction in the auto leveling suspension For additional information refer to Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual eri a Engine oil pressure low Engine coolant temperature high warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure or high engine coolant temperature If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving pull off the road in a safe area stop the engine and allow it to cool If the light remains on after checking the oil and coolant stop the en gine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop This light is not designed to indicate a low oil or low coolant level Check the oil level with the dipstick and check the coolant level on the reservoir See Engine oil and Checking engine coolant level in the Maintenance and Instruments and controls 2 15 do it yourself section of this manua
51. flat Reverse this process to return the 2nd row captain s chairs to a seating position Make sure to properly raise the seat back to an upright position and push the seat cushion down into place Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 17 Folding the 2nd row bench seat if so equipped To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum cargo hauling Q Pull the strap forward located in the center of each seat cushion and fold each seat cushion toward the front of the vehicle 2 Then lift up on the recline lever on the side of the outboard seats to fold the outboard seat backs flat To fold the center seatback flat pull up on the strap on the edge of the center seat cushion and fold the seatback toward the front of the vehicle 1 18 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 3 There is a carpet panel flap on the back of each seat that can be folded toward the back of the vehicle To return the 3rd row split bench seat to a seating position unfold the seatback and push it back until it latches into position 4 The carpet panel flap provides a level cargo floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded flat To return the outboard 2nd row bench seats to a seating position reverse the process for the outboard seats To return the center seat to a seating posi tion lift up on the pull strap on the back of the seat base while lifting on the seatback Then push the
52. indication of a malfunction AWARNING The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is designed to help improve driving stabil ity but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur faces and always drive carefully Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are ex tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy namic Control system may not operate properly This could adversely affect ve hicle handling performance and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not stan dard equipment or are extremely dete riorated the Vehicle Dynamic Control system VDC may not operate properly and the VDC off indicator light may come on When driving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on Do not drive on these types of roads When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light may illuminate This is not a malfunction Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface
53. not to the vehicle bumper or axle The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners Trailer lights A CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system a commercially available power type module converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source The module converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits Using a module converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle s electrical sys tem See a reputable trailer dealer to ob tain the proper equipment and to have it installed Trailer lights should comply with federal and or local regulations For assistance in hooking up trailer lights contact a NISSAN dealer or repu table trailer dealer Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7 pin trailer harness connector If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4 pin connector an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle Adapters are available at NISSAN deal ers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retail ers Technical and consumer information 9 23 Trailer brakes When towing a trailer load of 3 500 Ibs
54. on steep grades or rocky sandy muddy roads 1 The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink Stop the vehicle Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the shift selector has been moved to the N position If the indicator light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while Then the light will turn on or off Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO Otherwise gears may grind damaging the drive system 2 While changing in and out of 4LO the ignition switch must be ON and the vehicle s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights 4WD shift and 4LO position indicator to be operable Otherwise the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing 3 Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO The BFF indicator light if so equipped will also turn on when 4LO is selected See Vehicle dynamic control system later in this section 5 22 Starting and driving The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the driving conditions There are four types of drive modes available AUTO 2WD 4H and 4LO The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the transfer case operation Rotate the switch to move between each mode 2WD AUTO 4H and 4LO You must push the switch in to select 4LO
55. ously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 2 48 Instruments and controls AWARNING Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the roof rack Heavy loading of the roof rack has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or abnor mal handling maneuvers e Roof rack load should be evenly distributed e Do not exceed maximum roof rack load weight capacity e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury A CAUTION ROOF RACK Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack If you cannot comfort ably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground use a ladder or stool Instruments and controls 2 49 Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof rack Do not load more than 200 Ibs 91 kg on entire roof rack Be sure load is evenly distributed across both crossbars Be careful that your ve hicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or its Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear The GVWR and GAWR are located on the F M V S S label located on the driver s door pillar For more information rega
56. point on the floor behind the child re The center position of the 3rd row bench seat is the seating position that can use a top tether strap First secure the child restraint with the seat belt as applicable 1 Position the top tether strap over the top of the center seating position seatback 2 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the floor behind the child re straint straint 3 Tighten the tether strap according to the 3 Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any manufacturer s instructions to remove any LRS0640 slack seein niin esi eae not 3rd row bench seat If you have any questions when installing a j i INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP top tether strap child restraint on the rear If you have any questions when installinga 3rd row bench seat seat consult your NISSAN dealer for de top tether strap on the rear seat consult tails your NISSAN dealer for details AWARNING In the 3rd row bench seat a child restraint with a top tether strap can only be used in the center position Do not place in an outboard seating position and attempt to angle the tether strap to the center position Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 49 BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats AWARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases
57. press the button again The indicator light will turn on The indicator light will illuminate when the auto matic anti glare feature is operating For more information about the compass and compass features 2 if so equipped see Compass display in the Instruments and con trols section of this manual TF LPD0469 LPD0470 Type B Without compass Type C With compass Type B and Type C To turn on the automatic anti glare feature again ee ie press The indicator light will illuminate when the Ea automatic anti glare feature is operating the button for inside mirrors without compass To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press l the O button for inside mirrors without e the button for inside mirrors with compass compass e the button for inside mirrors with Ne Indicator light will turn on compass Some vehicles are also equipped with automatic The indicator light will turn off anti glare outside mirrors For additional informa tion see Automatic anti glare outside mirrors later in this section Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 33 For information on HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver operation see the HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instrument and controls sec tion of this manual For information on the compass display if so equipped see Compass display in the Instru ments and controls section of this m
58. the pointer to the beginning of the disc In effect it will ignore the last stored disc position and upon receipt of the next play message will begin at the Title Menu or at the beginning of the disc DISPLAY If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2 seconds the display menu will appear on the screen The display menu will remain on the screen for 10 seconds if no subsequent control activations occur e Use the NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate within the display menu and use ENTER to select the item NAVIGATION KEYS If media is in activated MENU mode the NAVI GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up Down Left and Right within the menu If display control menu is on the NAVIGATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up Down Left and Right within the menu ENTER In MENU mode press the ENTER button to se lect MENU items In the display menu press the ENTER button to select items for modification as per the on screen instructions Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 87 MENU If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU button is pressed the DVD menu will appear on the screen Use the Navigation Keys to navigate within the menu and use ENTER to select the item Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY mode TITLE Press the TITLE button to return the DVD media to the title of the DVD Press the TITLE button again to return to the previous stop p
59. 4 31 Volume and beeps settings Navigation volume For navigation volume settings refer to the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual for infor mation regarding these settings Phone volume For phone volume settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System With Navigation Sys tem later in this section Settings gt Volume and Beeps 8 00 rack Bi UP A Guidance voice ON Z Ringer vor ome f incoming can CMMS E Z Outgoing Call Olle pp samen on Ig Poss 6 6 DOWN Y 6 DOWN Poss 6 6 DOWN Y Beep when a button is pushed Beep setting With this option on indicator light illuminated a beep will sound if any control panel button is pressed Phone settings For phone settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System With Navigation System later in this section 4 32 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 12 OFF BUTTON To change the display brightness press the Xt D OFF button Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display The brightness can then be adjusted using the NISSAN controller If no operation is performed within 10 seconds the display will return to the previous display Press and hold the 2 OFF button for more than two seconds to turn the display off Press the button again to turn the display on REARVIEW MONITOR if so equipped When the shift selector is shifted into t
60. AUTO UNLOCK settings push and hold the power door lock switch tothe position UNLOCK for more than 5 seconds To change AUTO LOCK settings push and hold the power door lock switch to the position LOCK for more than 5 seconds When activated the hazard warning lights will flash twice When deactivated the haz ard warning lights will flash once The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors When the lever is in the lock position the door can be opened only from the outside REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use The remote keyless entry keyfob trans mits radio waves when the buttons are pushed The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and com munication systems Do not operate the remote keyless entry keyfob while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight It is possible to lock unlock all doors turn on the interior ligh
61. CD CompactFlash CF with MP3 or WMA if so equipped Terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD CF can reduce the file size by approximately 10 1 ratio Sampling 44 1 kHz Bit rate 128 kbps with virtually no perceptible loss in quality MP3 compres sion removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn t hear 4 42 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio format created by Mi crosoft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is cal
62. Cargo area storage bin in the Instru ments and controls section In case of emergency 6 3 3 Unscrew the rotating mechanism A coun 4 Assemble the two straight pieces of the jack terclockwise until loosened on cradle Re rod Find the oval shaped opening above move the Jack the middle of the license plate Pass the T shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it toward the spare tire winch located directly above the spare tire A CAUTION Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown 6 4 Incase of emergency Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle Seat the T shaped end of the jack rod into the T shaped opening of the tire winch Ap ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Once the spare tire is completely lowered reach under the vehicle remove the retainer chain and carefully slide the tire from under the rear of the vehicle A CAUTION Be sure to center the spare tire suspend ing plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire AWARNING Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack If it is nec essary to work under the vehicle sup port it with safety stands e Use only the jack provided with
63. Delete all of the downloaded phonebook instrument panel to hang up If any other Downloaded Phonebook entries screen is currently displayed press the PHONE button to display the Call in Progress screen first then press the PHONE button again to hang up See the following information for each item Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 115 Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone book Delete a single entry from the downloaded phonebook Touch the corresponding letter key then touch the name key you wish to delete Touch the Yes key to delete the entry Automatic Hold If this item is turned on an incoming call will be placed on hold automatically after several rings Use Vehicle Ringtone If this item is turned on a specific ringtone that is different from the cellular phone s will sound when receiving a call Delete Call Logs Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs from the list Bluetooth Setup See the following information for each item n Biuetooth Pair Phone x Priority Change Remove Paired Phone i Use handsfree mode for paired phones gt Settings gt Bluetooth Setup 8 es Biuetooth Info SK bey ETE TE ust i Bluetooth If this item is turned off the connection be tween the cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module will be canceled Bluetooth Info Check information about the device name vehicle name device address dev
64. Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re paired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail with out warning e The use of retread tires is not recommended For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet esey Four wheel drive models A CAUTION Always use tires of the same type size brand construction bias bias belted or radial and tread pattern on all four wheels Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may dam age the transmission transfer case and differential gears Maintenance and do it yourself 8 43 If excessive tire wear is found it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size brand construction and tread pattern The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary Contact a NISSAN dealer Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be bal anced as required Wheel balance service should be per formed with the wheels off the vehicle Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage e For additional informa
65. NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department toll free at 1 800 NISSAN 1 READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces your vehicle may be re quired to be in what is called the ready condi tion for an Inspection Maintenance I M test of the emission control system The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns Usually the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition Before taking the I M test check the vehicle s inspection maintenance test readiness condi tion Turn the ignition switch ON without starting the engine If the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds the I M test condition is not ready If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds the I M test condition is ready If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a not ready con dition drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern a NISSAN de
66. P Park position 2 Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON direction 3 Turn the key toward the LOCK position The shift selector can be moved from the P Park position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC although it does not show on the lock cylinder When the ignition switch is OFF the steering wheel is not locked In order for the steering wheel to be locked it must be turned about 1 6 of a turn counterclock wise from the straight up position To lock the steering wheel turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To unlock the steering wheel push the ignition switch in and turn it gently while rotating the steer ing wheel slightly right and left If the battery of the vehicle equipped with the Intelligent Key system is discharged the ignition switch cannot be turned from 5 10 Starting and driving the LOCK position even using the me chanical key IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS Push in the ignition switch to the position when you turn it LOCK Normal parking position The ignition switch can only be locked in the LOCK position The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed in and turned to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key ACC Accessories This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running ON Normal o
67. Printed in U S A 10 TAGO D
68. RPT the playlist currently being played will be repeated 1 TRK RPT the current track playing will be repeated ALL Playlist RDM all the tracks in the playlist will be played randomly 1 Playlist RDM the tracks in the current playlist will be played randomly Music Box gt Menu 8 00 Play by Artist Sij Play by Album i Play by Date Piay by Mood Piay by Category 1711 DOWN Music Box menu There are some options available during play back Touch the Menu key then select one of the following that are displayed on the screen if necessary Refer to the following information for each item e Play by Artist Plays songs by an artist whose music is currently being played The artists are sorted in alphabetical order e Play by Album Plays tracks in each album The albums are sorted in alphabetical order Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 65 e Play by Category Search Keywords Edit Albums Rarely Played Edit Albums Music Box System info Husie Bore Mena 8 00 ace Plays music from one of the following cat Music Box gt Menu 8 00 ancx F egories Search Artists My Favorites E Search Albums Search Albums Hit Son gs T Search Song Details Search Song Details Kids Songs z Search Keywords i E Search Artists 711 DOWN 6 11 Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks by the artist and
69. S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat Booster seat installation A CAUTION Do not use the lap shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety Child Restraint and Booster Seats sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat WRS0699 If you must install a booster seat in the front seat move the seat to the rear most position Position the booster seat on the seat Only place it in a front facing direction Always follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 51 LRS0454 Front passenger position 3 The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit If the head restraint is removed store it ina secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed See Head restraint adjustment in this section for hea
70. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off road use However avoid driving in deep wa ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use unlike a conventional off road ve hicle Remember that two wheel drive models are less capable than four wheel drive models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud or the like Please observe the following precautions AWARNING Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain e Do not drive across steep slopes In stead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes Off road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward Starting and driving 5 7 Many hills are too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you may stall If you drive down them you may not be able to control your speed If you drive across them you may roll over Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill At the top there could be a drop off or other hazard that could cause an accident If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill never at tempt to turn around Your vehicle
71. Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or cat egories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its online services at any time GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES Copyright Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technol ogy and related content delivery For more infor mation visit www gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2006 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2006 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 778 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and othe
72. Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order the desired order Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 45 RADIO AM FM DISC AUX RADIO AM FM button 7 REAR CTRL button PRESET A B C button 8 SCAN button RPT button 9 TRACK button Ad speaker control button 10 SEEK CAT button RDM button 11 TUNE FLDR and AUDIO control knob PAUSE MUTE button 12 CD load button 46 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 13 14 15 16 Station and CD select 1 6 buttons amp CD eject button VOL ON OFF control knob DISC AUX button When the RADIO AM FM button is pressed the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite re ceiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD CHANGER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions earlier in this section The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in
73. Starting Before starting the engine 5 12 Jump Staring s a sore so Se a a 6 8 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 10 6 Fush Starling 6 hae aa a owe Se 6 10 Starting the engine aaau 5 12 Startup screen 2 2 a 4 20 Steering Heated steering wheel 2 35 Power steering fluid 8 11 Power steering system 5 28 Tilting steering wheel 3 30 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 73 DOPO 4 4 2 6 2 614 od oot amp Merde wos 8 30 Storage 2s ob 4 4 e 28 ew ba le eS 2 40 Overhead storage compartment 2 43 Storage Dis ox s a aoe a e ace aKa ew 2 43 2 47 Storage tray 2 as a a ww a aaa 2 40 OUNVISUIGs 2 ha ee a e oe G aa Ss a 3 31 Sunglasses case 0 000 0 ee 2 41 Sunglasses holder 04 2 41 UOD a ae 4 Ge Be oo Be ee ime Be 2 54 Supplemental air bag warning labels 1 67 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 68 2 18 Supplemental front impact air bag system 1 61 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels 1 67 Precautions on supplemental restraint SVSleWes es ok ew ee oe ee ee 1 53 Supplemental restraint system Supplemental air bag system 1 53 Switch Autolight switch a 6 4 2 5 64H waa 2 31 Automatic power window switch 2 52 Fog light SWICK s s a s sosa 22 424 2 33 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 30 Headlight c
74. VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driv ing speed changes AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Balance and Fade Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Balance Fade To adjust Bass Treble Balance and Fade press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears in the display Turn the tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO control knob re peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Otherwise the radio or CD display will automati cally reappear after about 10 seconds Settings G Adjust tone and advanced audio settings Speed Sensitive Volume SSV To change the SSV mode from OFF 0 to 5 press the SETTING button Then touch the Au dio key and the audio settings screen will be displayed Touch the key or key to change the SSV While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by touching the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level touch the BACK key Monitor climate aud
75. When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch Push and hold the ACCEL RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de sire release the switch Push and release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed in creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following three methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch Re lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed Push and release the COAST SET switch Each time you do this the set speed de creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle re turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h Starting and driving BREAK IN SCHEDULE A CAUTION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short ened engine life and reduced engine performance Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed either fast or slow and do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Avoid quick starts Avoid hard braking as
76. a Clock Format Daylight Saving Time Clock Adjust Display clock in top right corner of display Clock The following display will appear after pressing the SETTING button then selecting the Clock key using the NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER button On screen Clock When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Clock Format Choose either the 12h 1 2 hour clock display or the 24h 24 hour clock display Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 11 Daylight Savings Time When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated daylight savings time is on To turn off the daylight savings time touch the ON key the amber indicator light will disappear Settings gt Time Zone Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic G Manually select time zone Time Zone Select the Time Zone key the Time Zone screen will appear Select one of the following zones depending on the current location by selecting the correct time zone key and pressing the ENTER button to enable that time zone indicator light will illumi nate for that location Pacific Mountain Central Eastern 4 12 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Atlantic Newfoundland Aleutian Hawaii Alaska Clock Adjust Clock Adjust Adjust the time by man
77. a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Malfunction Indicator Light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system To re duce or avoid emission control system dam age do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH 72 km h avoid hard acceleration or deceleration avoid steep uphill grades if possible reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking and come on steady Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer A CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel economy and possible damage to the emission con trol system Security indicator light This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK OFF or ACC position This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational For additional information see Security sys tems later in this section Instruments and controls 2 19 SLIP Slip indicator light This indicator light will blink when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator blinks on If this happens adjust your driving accordingly The slip indicator light also comes on whe
78. activated SERVICE ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light OON MIL If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing or if the vehicle runs out of fuel Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons 11 4 liters of fuel in the fuel tank After a few driving trips the ENGINE light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys tem inspection maintenance test See Readi ness for inspection maintenance I M test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual Operation The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in one of two ways Malfunction Indicator Light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected Check the fuel filler cap If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The SK light should turn off after a few driving trips If the ENGINE light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by
79. all the lights when it is light Keep all the lights on for up to 180 seconds after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed NOTE Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad justed See Comfort amp convenience set tings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems sec tion later in this manual To turn on the autolight system 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi tion 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON 3 The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off Initially if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a door Is opened and left open the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes If another door is opened during the 5 minutes then the 5 minute timer is reset To turn the autolight system off turn the switch to the OFF P4 or position Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor 1 located in the top side of the instrument panel The autolight sensor controls the autolight if it is cov ered the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position your vehicle s battery could be come discharged Instruments and controls 2 31 Headlight beam select C To select the high beam function push the lever forward
80. an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Starting and driving 5 3 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS mal function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended
81. and if appro priate in a child restraint 1 22 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING The seat belt should be properly ad justed to a snug fit Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an acci dent Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly AWARNING e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never put the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS NOT THE WAIST A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted Doing so may reduce its effectiveness Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts If the seat belt warning light glows con tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened it may indicate a mal function in the system Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer No changes should be made to the seat belt system For example do not modify the seat belt add material or
82. and or M amp S on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially re duced in snow and Ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires If you do not it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Generally snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never ex ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the same size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS A CAUTION Tire chains cables should not be
83. and the vehicle MUST be stationary and the shift selector in the N position when chang ing into or out of 4LO AWARNING When parking apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and the ATP warning light goes off Otherwise the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the P position A CAUTION Never shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 4L and 4H while driving The 4H position provides greater trac tion Avoid excessive speed as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures and could damage drivetrain components Speeds over 62 MPH 100 km h in 4H is not recommended The 4LO position provides maximum power and traction Avoid raising ve hicle speed excessively as the maxi mum speed is approximately 31 MPH 50 km h When driving straight shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD AUTO or 4H position Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing Do not shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 2WD AUTO and 4H while driving on steep downhill grades Use the en gine brake and low automatic transmis sion gears D1 or D2 for engine braking e Do not operate the 4WD shift switch between 2WD AUTO and 4H with the rear wheels spinning Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise an
84. anyone to place their hand leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or WRS0365 SSS0162 lean against the door Some examples Do not lean against doors or windows Do not lean against doors or windows of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations 1 58 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat If the side air bag inflates you may be seriously injured Be especially care ful with children who should always be properly restrained Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations e Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks They may interfere with side air bag inflation Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 59 1 60 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag inflators Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bags Air bag Control Unit ACU Supplemental front impact air bag mod ules Crash zone sensor Occupant classification system control unit Occupant classification sensor pres sure sensor Seat belt buckle switches Seat belt with p
85. are genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION Unfortunately accidents do occur In this unlikely event there is some important information you should know Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non genuine collision parts in order to cut costs among other reasons Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN s original exacting specifica tions if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value the solution is simple Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts NISSAN does not warrant non NISSAN parts nor does NISSAN s warranty apply to damage caused by a non genuine part Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety preserve your warranty pro tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle And if your vehicle was leased using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident Non genuine imitation parts may not provide such built in safeguards Also non genuine parts of ten show premature wear rust and corrosion Why should you take a chance In over 40 states the law says you
86. available commands 5 Say Dial The system acknowledges the command and makes the call For additional command options see List of voice commands later in this section Receiving a call When you hear the ring tone press the OS button on the steering wheel Once the call has ended press the ee on the steering wheel button NOTE If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone press the 22E button on the steering wheel For additional command options see List of voice commands later in this section LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu Call or Call International Phone Book Memo Pad Setup When you press and release the amp 4 button on the steering wheel you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu The following pages describe these commands and the com mands in each sub menu Remember to wait for the tone before speaking You can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response If you want to end an action without completing it you can say Cancel or Quit at any time the system is waiting for a response The system will end the VR session Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to go back to the previous command you can say Go back or Correction any time
87. be equipped with an optional trailer tow package The trailer tow package in cludes a receiver type frame mounted hitch This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available from your NISSAN dealer If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver type frame mounted hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds rough road surfaces or passing trucks AWARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings Your vehicle may be ca pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight The di
88. break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped When handling the bulb do not touch the glass envelope e Use the same number and wattage as Originally installed as shown in the chart e Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust mois ture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light Disconnect the negative battery cable The fog light is accessible in front of the front tire and behind the bumper 3 Disconnect the bulb connector 1 4 Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re move Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog light assembly Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it Do not touch the glass envelope Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE To adjust the fog light vertical aim Access the aiming screw from underneath the front bumper The aiming screw is located on the bottom of the fog light housing Turn the screw clockwise to raise the pattern Turn the screw counterclockwise to lower the pattern Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight assembly High HB3 9005 Low HB4 9006 Park Turn 3457K Sidemarker 194 Side turn signal light if so equipped Front fog light 881 Puddle lamp 906 Room map lights Personal lights WXW52 Footwell 158 Glove box light 158 Vanity mirror light Step light 194 Cargo light AL67 High moun
89. chime will sound to announce the reversal Auto Reverse If an obstacle is detected during power open or power close a warning chime will sound and the lift gate will reverse direction and return to the full open or full close position If a second obstacle is detected the lift gate motion will stop and the drive motor will disengage The lift gate will enter manual mode A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the lift gate If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip during power close the lift gate will reverse di rection and return to the full open position NOTE If the pinch strip is damaged or removed the power close function will not operate AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the lift gate Manual Mode If power operation is not available the lift gate may be operated manually Power operation may not be available if the cancel switch is in the on position if multiple obstacles have been de tected in a single power cycle or if battery volt age Is low Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 25 Safe Mode If the lift gate gas stays lose pressure the power lift gate safe mode is activated When the safe mode is activated the lift gate slowly closes A continuous warning chime sounds until the lift gate is in the fully down position Then t
90. contact with or covered by metallic materials When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com puter When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is dis charged replace it with a new one When the Intelligent Key battery is low the Intel ligent Key indicator will illuminate after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves such as sig nals from a TV and personal computer the bat tery life may become shorter For information regarding replacement of a bat tery see Battery replacement in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual Because the steering wheel is locked electrically unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely discharged Un locking the steering wheel is impossible even if the Intelligent Key is inserted into the ignition switch Pay special attention that the vehicle bat tery is not completel
91. crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understand ing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling Sounds are not recorded These data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equip ment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manu facturer and NISSAN dealer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if th
92. de pends upon the conditions around the vehicle The remote keyless entry function will not func tion under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range When the doors or the rear liftgate are open or not closed securely Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 17 When the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged A CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle Ay a 1 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion WPD0359 Locking doors 2 Close all doors 3 Press the button on the Intelligent Key 4 The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once 5 All doors will be locked 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustments A CAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles Unlocking doors WPD0360 1 Press the if Key button on the Intelligent 2 The hazard warning lights flash once 3 Press the button again within 5 sec onds to unlock all doors All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the button Opening any doors Pushing the ignition switch The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The light ca
93. dealer or any automotive accessory store UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un derbody and suspension Before the winter pe riod and again in the spring the underseal must be checked and if necessary retreated GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film A CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could damage the electri cal conductors radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp ened in a mild soap solution especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used If not removed road salt can discolor the wheels A CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels e Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as am bient temperature Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner wit
94. directed to dial an extension by an automated system Say Send one two three four The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers The system then ends the VR ses sion and returns to the call Say star for Say pound for Transfer call Use the Transfer Call com mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired The system announces Transfer call Call transferred to privacy mode The system then ends the VR session You can also issue the Transfer Call com mand again to return to a hands free call through the vehicle Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it Use the mute command again to unmute your voice 4 100 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems NOTE If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice Phone book NOTE Phone book commands are not available when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phone Book New Entry Edit Delete List Names The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each phone paired with the system Each name can have up to 4 locations phone numbers associ ated with
95. discs with an adapter e CDs that are not round e CDs with a paper label e CDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs It has no capability to record or burn CDs If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 41 CHECK DISC e Confirm that the CD is inserted cor rectly the label side is facing up etc Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches PRESS EJECT This is an error due to excessive tem perature inside the player Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button After a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio sys tem only MP3 or WMA if so equipped CD CompactFlash CF player if so equipped Do not force a CF card into the slot This could damage the CF card and or player During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the humidity If this occurs remove the CF card and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely The CF player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment tempera ture is extremely high Decrease the tem perature before use Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly Compact Disc
96. functions can be used only for the DVD discs which correspond to them CARE AND MAINTENANCE Use a lightly dampened lint free cloth to clean the surfaces of your NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System DVD player face screen remote control etc Do not attempt to use the system in extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C or above 158 F 70 C Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme humidity conditions less than 10 or more than 75 A CAUTION e Do not use any solvents or cleaning solutions when cleaning the video system e Do not use excessive force on the moni tor screen Avoid touching or scratching the moni tor screen as it may become dirty or damaged HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD A CAUTION Handle a DVD by its edges Never touch the surface of the disc To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion e Do not use a conventional record cleaner benzine thinner or alcohol in tended for industrial use e A new disc may be rough on its inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges using the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated e Never attempt to use a DVD that has been cracked deformed or repaired using adhesive Doing so may cause damage to the equipment Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami nation or flaws Otherwise signals may not be read properly Do n
97. ignition and always lock the vehicle when unattended Be aware of your surroundings and park in secure well lit areas whenever possible Many devices offering additional protection such as component locks identification markers and tracking systems are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment Check with your insurance company to see If you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features How to arm the vehicle security system 1 Close all windows The system can be armed even if the windows are open 2 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion and remove the key 3 Close all doors Lock all doors The doors can be locked with the power door lock switch if the door is opened locked and then closed the key master or mechanical NISSAN Intelligent Key models any request switch NISSAN Intelligent Key models the keyfob or NISSAN Intelligent Key 2 26 Instruments and controls Keyfob and NISSAN Intelligent Key opera tion Push the button All doors lock The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked When the button is pushed with all doors locked the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re minder that the doors are already locked The horn may or may not beep Refer to Silencing the horn beep feature in the Pre d
98. in the infrared headphones 4 80 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Precautions Start the engine when using the DVD entertain ment system AWARNING The driver must not attempt to operate the DVD System or wear the headphones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation A CAUTION Only operate the DVD while the vehicle engine is running Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery e Do not allow the system to get wet Excessive moisture such as spilled liq uids may cause the system to malfunction While playing VIDEO CD media this DVD player does not guarantee complete functionality of all VIDEO CD formats Copyright and trademark The technology protected by the U S patent and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other right holders is adopted for this system This copyright protected technology cannot be used without a permit from Macrovision Corporation It is limited to be personal use etc as long as the permit from Macrovision Corporation is not issued Modifying or disassembling is prohibited Dolby digital is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Inc Dolby and the double D mark are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Inc e DTS and DTS Digital Surroun
99. in the front passenger seat Keep seatbacks as upright as pos sible after fitting the child restraint Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child re straint while in the vehicle When the child restraint is not in use keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt In a sudden stop or colli sion loose objects can injure occu pants or damage the vehicle Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 33 A CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating sur face and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system referred to as the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem Some child restraints include rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be con nected to these anchors For details see LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem later in this section If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint the vehicle seat belts can be used Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes When se lecting any child restraint keep the following points in mind Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the child restraint in your vehicle
100. influence of al cohol or drugs e ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro priate child restraint systems Pre teen children should be seated in the rear seat e ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle e ALWAYS review this Owner s Manual for important safety information For descriptions specified for four wheel drive models a 3 y mark is placed at the begin ning of the applicable sections items As with other vehicles with features for off road use failure to operate four wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read Driving safety precautions in the Start ing and driving section of this manual ON PAVEMENT AND OFF ROAD DRIVING This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off road use As with other vehicles with features of this type fail ure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read On pavement and off road driving precautions and Avoid ing collision and rollover and Driving safety precautions in the Starting and driving se
101. installed on P275 60R20 size tires Installation of the tire chains cables on P275 60R20 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle If you plan to use tire chains cables you should install P265 70R18 size tires on your vehicle Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before installing tire chains When installing tire chains make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s suggestions Use only SAE class S chains Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance Vehicles that can use Class S chains are de signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device tire chains or cables The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size Other types may damage your vehicle Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufac turer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody If possible avoid fully load ing your vehicle when using tire chains In addi tion drive at a reduced speed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected Tire chains must be
102. it NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B New entry Use the New Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name you would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if the name sounds too much like a name already stored the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Once the system accepts the name and you confirm it is correct the system asks for a location Home Office Mobile or Other For example say Home The system acknowledges the location The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers earlier in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manua
103. learn the best way to transport your child There are three basic types of child restraint systems Rear facing child restraint Forward facing child restraint Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child s size Generally infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 Ibs 9 kg should be placed in rear facing child restraints Forward facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward facing child restraint AWARNING Infants and children need special protec tion The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fit ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use appropriate child restraints All U S states and Canadian provinces or terri tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children See Child Re straints later in this section A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH Lower Anchor and Teth ers for CHildren system or with the vehicle seat belt See Child Restraints section for more in formation NISSAN recommends that all pre teens and children be restrained in the rear seat Studie
104. manual A CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties 9 18 Technical and consumer information Total trailer load Tongue load Tongue load x 100 10 to 15 Total trailer load Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib uting hitch keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu facturer The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow ing Towing Load Specification chart If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load Gross vehicle weight Gross axle weight AT11025 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight GVW maximum Gross Axle Weight GAW The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment In addition front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment such as the trailer hitch will add weight to the vehicl
105. manual AWARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor NEVER use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas Damage to paint and other protective coat ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand dirt and water on the ve hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used Appearance and care 7 5 Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro sion to those parts which are not well ventilated Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy road salt use acceler ates the corrosion process Road salt also accel erates the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often
106. metal bands or any other jewelry Do not lean over the battery when jump starting Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause se rious injury Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan It could come on at any time Keep hands and other objects away from it Vehicle pooeleme started e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal 5 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes 6 Keep the engine speed of the booster ve hicle at about 2 000 rpm and start the en gine of the vehicle being jump started Vehicle with AA A CAUTION battery for Cloth booster Do not keep the starter motor engaged for gt WCE0054 more than 10 seconds If the engine does t start right away place the ignition 3 Remove the vent caps on the battery if so MOs i ye i AK WARNING equipped Cover the battery with an old EE ene ae poston ane wats se Always follow the instructions below cloth to reduce explosion hazard SESS ee ULL ae UU Failure to do so could result in damage to he ec EEEE E E EEST 7 After starting the engine carefully discon the charging system and cause personal e LAOR q nect the negative cable and then the positive injury illustrated eee 1 If the booster battery is in another vehicle A CAUTION 8 Replace the vent caps if so equipped Be posi
107. not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in 142 5 cm tall and weighs between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 Ibs 86 kg A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoul der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo men The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three point type seat belt The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck use the shoulder belt without the booster seat CHILD RESTRAINTS AWARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS 1 32 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in structions for proper use and installa tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passeng
108. object further than 12 in 30 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only 3 seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again The FSS automatically turns on when the shift selector is placed in a forward gear and the ignition switch is ON The front and rear sonar system off switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the FSS on and off To turn the FSS off the ignition switch must be ON and the shift selector in D Drive An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off If the indicator light illuminates when the FSS is not turned off it may indicate a malfunction in the FSS Keep the FSS sensors located on the front bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the FSS COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing apply de icer through the key hole If the lock becomes frozen heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob ANTI FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem perature will drop below 32 F 0 C check the anti freeze to assure proper winter protection For details see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual BATTERY If the batt
109. off Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise Place a large drain pan under the drain plug Remove the drain plug 8 with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time See Changing engine oil filter later in this section Waste oil must be disposed of prop erly Check your local regulations AWARNING Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep used engine oil out of reach of children A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 6 Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not use excessive force Drain plug tightening torque 22 29 ft lb 29 39 N m 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening then install the oil filler cap securely See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time Use these specifications for reference onl
110. only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load Specification chart earlier in this section A CAUTION Special hitches which include frame re inforcements are required for towing above 2 000 Ib 907 kg Suitable genu ine NISSAN hitches ball mounts and hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport utility vehicles are available at a NISSAN dealer The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact absorbing bumper Do not use axle mounted hitches Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys tem brake system etc to install a trailer hitch To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear where practical remove the receiver when not in use Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted When towing with the hitch ball mounted to the rear bumper do not make sharp turns The trailer may con tact the bumper and cause damage to the bumper or trailer Tire pressures When towing a trailer inflate the ve hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer s specifications Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch
111. or moving objects The RSS detects obstacles up to 3 ft 1 0 m from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 12 in 30 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a station ary or receding object further than 12 in 30 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will 5 32 Starting and driving sound for only 3 seconds Once the system de tects an object approaching the tone will sound again The RSS automatically turns on when the shift selector is placed in R Reverse and the ignition switch is ON The front and rear sonar system off switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off To turn the RSS off the ignition switch must be ON and the shift selector in R Reverse An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off it may indicate a malfunction in the RSS Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS FRONT SONAR SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING Always look around before proceeding The
112. parts Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 KEYFOB if so equipped Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows Open the lid using a coin 2 Remove the battery 8 26 Maintenance and do it yourself 3 Install a new battery with the facing down Hold the battery by the edges Holding the battery across the contact points will seri ously deplete the storage capacity Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as it could cause a malfunction Recommended battery CR2025 or equivalent 4 Close the lid securely 5 Press the button then the Bi button two or three times to check the key fob operation If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement perform step 5 e An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal e The keyfob is water resistant how ever if it does get wet immediately wipe completely dry e The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft 10 m from the vehicle This range may vary with conditions FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY if so equipped Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol
113. phone and voice recognition systems 4 61 SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons Press the 4 SEEK CAT button while the CF card is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the gt TRACK button while the CF card is playing to skip to the begin ning of the next track If you press and hold the SEEK CAT re wind button or the gt TRACK fast forward button for more than approximately 1 5 seconds the CF card will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the SEEK CAT rewind button orthe gt TRACK fast forward button is released the CF card will return to the normal playing speed The NISSAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks when the CF card is being played For more information on how to use the NISSAN controller see How to use the NISSAN control ler earlier in this section Folder selection To change to another folder in the CF card either Turn the TUNE FLDR knob right or left Touch the desired folder key on screen Use the NISSAN controller SCAN RPT button Pressing the SCAN RPT button while the CF card is playing changes the play pattern as fol lows 1 CF CARD RPT 1 FOLDER RPT 1 TRK RPT 1 CF CARD RDM 1 FOLDER RDM 1 CF CARD RPT 1 CF CARD RPT the entire CF card will be repeated 1 FOLDER RPT the folder currently being ac cessed will be repeated 1 TRK RPT the current track playing will be repeated 1 CF CARD RDM all t
114. phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the SRE button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session Memo pad Main Menu Memo Pad Record A Play Delete The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice memos each up to 20 seconds long 4 102 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Record A The system announces Recording and a tone sounds signaling you to begin Speak the information you wish to record clearly When you are done press the FS or MORE button on the steering wheel A tone sounds and the system announces Memo recorded Another tone sounds to end the VR session If the memo pad is full the system asks If you wish to record over the oldest memo Play The system plays back all the memos in the order of newest to oldest The system ends the VR session If there are no memos recorded the system an nounces No messages to play The system ends the VR session Delete The Delete command erases all memos The system asks you to confirm this action before deleting all memos Setup Main Menu Setup Pair Phone List Phone Select Phone Change Priority Delete Phone
115. phones are paired the system announces No paired phones to list The system then ends the VR session Select phone Use the Select Phone command to select a phone of lesser priority when two or more phones paired with Bluetooth Hands Free Phone Sys tem are in the vehicle at the same time The system asks you to name the phone and confirm the selection Once the selection is confirmed the selected phone remains active until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or you select a new phone Change priority Use the Change Priority command to change the priority level of the active phone The priority level determines which phone is ac tive when more than one paired Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level 1 2 3 4 5 If the new priority level is already being used for another phone the two phones will swap priority levels For example if the current priority levels are Priority Level 1 Phone A Priority Level 2 Phone B Priority Level 3 Phone C Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 103 and you change the priority level of Phone C to Level 1 then Priority Level 1 Phone C Priority Level 2 Phone B Priority Level 3 Phone A Delete phone Use the Delete Phone command to delete a specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth Hands F
116. power vent windows operate when the igni tion switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the driver s or passenger s door is opened during this 45 sec ond period power to the vent windows is can celled MANUAL VENT WINDOWS if so equipped To open a manual vent window pull the latch handle toward you until it releases To lock the window in the open position push the latch handle rearward until it locks To close a manual vent window pull the latch handle toward you and push the rear portion of the latch toward the rear of the vehicle until it locks Instruments and controls 2 53 MOONROOF if so equipped Maa DOWN CLOSE l TO AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The auto matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec onds even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position If the driver s door or the front passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the moon roof is canceled Sliding the moonroof To fully open the moonroof push the switch to ward the open position 2 54 Instruments and controls To fully close the moonroof push the switch toward the close position To open or close the moonroof part way push the switch in any direction while the moonroof is sliding open or closed to stop
117. recognition systems NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE The Alternate Command Mode enables control of the Audio Climate Control and Display sys tems as well as additional commands for the Vehicle Information Phone and Navigation sys tems With this setting active the system does not announce or display the available commands at each step When Alternate Command Mode is activated an expanded list of commands can be used after pushing the TALK f switch Under this mode the screen for Standard Mode commands is not available on the display Please review the expanded command list available when this mode is active as some Standard Mode com mands are replaced Please see examples of Alternate Command Mode screens Please note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and ways of speaking each command are increased You can turn this mode ON or OFF When this mode is activated the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options lI Elf commesue Gf SSC i a El atest command nose e00 nimi voice resasa 60w i G Settings gt Others F E Alternate Command Mode 5 Settings gt Voice Recognition Settings gt Voice Recognition ae Sl o a i Displays the commands of voice recognition i Adjust yore recognition settings Activating Alternate Command Mode 4 Highlight the Alternate Command Mode 6 Alternate Command M
118. refer to Silencing the horn beep feature later in this section For ve hicles with navigation system refer to Comfort amp convenience settings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition system sec tion of this manual a Unlocking doors LPD0210 Press the button on the keyfob once Only the driver s door unlocks The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition switch in any position except the ON posi tion The interior lights and puddle lights if so equipped turn on and the light timer acti vates for 30 seconds when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position with the ignition switch in any position except the ON position Press the if within 5 seconds button on the keyfob again All doors unlock The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed The interior lights can be turned off without wait ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition switch and placing it in the ON or START position locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF posi tion Auto relock Whenthe button onthe keyfob is pressed all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute unless one of the following operations is per formed Any door is opened A key is inserted into the ignition switch and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON Pre driving checks an
119. seat cushion back into place Make sure to hold the seat belts above the seat cushion and properly raise the seatback to an upright position Then push the seat cushion down into place Folding the 3rd row split bench seat if so equipped To fold the 3rd row split bench seat flat for maximum cargo capacity 1 Disconnect and secure the center seat belt and tongues into the retractor base See Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt later in this section 2 Lower the head restraints to the full down position 3 Then pull up on the latch located on the outside corner of each seatback and fold the seatback forward over the seat base AWARNING When returning the seatbacks be sure to attach the rear center seat belt connector Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt connector except when folding down the rear seat When attaching the rear center seat belt connector be certain that the seat backs are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured If the rear center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position serious personal injury may result in an accident or sud den stop Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 19 3RD ROW POWER FOLDING SEATS if so equipped The 3rd row power folding seat controls are located behind the 2nd row seat passenger s side on the 3rd row cup holder consol
120. so equipped Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and insert a CF card 4 into the Com pactFlash player slot 2 Then press the DISC AUX button repeatedly to switch to the CompactFlash mode If the system has been turned off while the Com pactFlash card was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the Com pactFlash card DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the system off and the CF card inserted the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and a CF card is inserted press the DISC AUX but ton repeatedly until the center display changes to the CompactFlash mode T Compact Flash a aren stan iz suomi 1CFCARD RPT MP3 CF display mode While listening to CF certain text might be able to be displayed Depending on how the files are encoded on the CF the following text might be able to be dis played by touching the Text key Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed File displays the name of the file currently playing Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name Compact Flash gt Text es Folder XXXXXXX File XXXXXXX Mp3 Song XXXXXXX Album Artist XXXXXXX XXXXXXX e Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name e Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artist s name Press the BACK button to exit the CF text display screen Monitor climate audio
121. splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction To help ensure safe driving some functions can not be operated while driving The on screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or muted Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper ate the navigation system Settings Display Navigation Comfort amp Conv Volume and Beeps Z Others Adjust tone and advanced audio settings Touch screen operation With this system the same operations as those for the NISSAN controller are possible using the touch screen operation Selecting the item Touch an item to select To select the Audio key touch the Audio key on the screen Touch the BACK key 2 to return to the previous screen Settings gt Volume and Beeps 8 00 rack TT E Guidance vol OMMMUME 3 aH E Ringer vo 2 lt S1MMINITILNe aa gi Outgoing Call tT AM B ee E O Adjusting the item Touch the key 1 or the key to adjust the settings Touch the UP key to scroll up to the previous page or touch the DOWN key to scroll down to next page Settings gt Edit Phone Name 8 00 sack DOO VOODOO OO Lowercase Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key 1 There are some options available when inputting characters e Uppercase Shows
122. starts playing the first track e Play by Date Search Albums Plays tracks in each album The albums are Displays a list of albums in order of the date sorted in order of the date when they were when they were stored in the system Se stored in the system lecting an album displays all of the tracks on e Play by Mood the album ang eae playing the first track Touch the Sort key to re sort albums in one Plays music from one of the following of the following order moods Relaxing Music Rec Recorded Date Lively Music Name Slow Music Release Year Upbeat Music AMSL 4 66 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Search Song Details Set the conditions and touch the Start Song Search key to search for a desired song that is stored in the system The con ditions are as follows Music Tempo All Slow Normal and Fast Decade All 70s 80s 90s 00s 10s and After Group All Male Artist Female Artist Group and Duo Category Rock Pop Latin Jazz R amp B Hip Hop Club Dance Punk Reggae Folk Blues Country Metal Easy Listen ing New Age Soundtrack Gospel amp Re ligious World Classical Children s and Other Search Keywords Input a search keyword using the keypad displayed on the screen For information see How to use the touch screen earlier in this section Edit Albums Select a category Re
123. the ACC or ON position and then push the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode radio or CD which was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the VOL ON OFF control knob Turn the VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driv ing speed changes AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Balance and Fade Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Balance Fade To adjust Bass Treble Balance and Fade press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears in the display Turn the tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO control knob re peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Otherwise the radio or CD display will automati cally reappear after about 10 seconds settings 12 00 Settings Display Beeps Clock Language Units Adjust tone and advanced audio settings Adjust tone and advanced audio settings tone and advanced audio settings Speed Sensitive Volume SSV To change the S
124. the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Con tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Information gt Trip Computer 8 00 zack 7 Elapsed Time 6 33 32 i 28 MPH Reset ALL Driving Distance 18 2 miles Average Speed Trip computer Press the INFO button then select the Trip Computer key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button The trip computer will display the following items Elapsed Time Journey time since the last reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59 minutes Driving Distance Distance driven miles or km since the last reset Average Speed Average speed driven MPH or km h since the last reset Resetting the trip computer Each item in the trip computer can be reset to O Select the Reset key on the item that needs to be reset using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button To reset all of the items in the trip computer select the Reset ALL key and press the ENTER button A confirmation screen will appear select the Yes key and press the ENTER button peme i Information gt Maintenance 8 00 sack 6000 12000 18000 Remi
125. the illustrations Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 55 AWARNING Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags side air bags or curtain and rollover air bags inflate if they are not properly re strained Pre teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat if possible 1 56 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An in flating front air bag could seriously in jure or kill your child See Child re straints earlier in this section for details WRS0431 Do not lean against the door AWARNING Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bags and roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bags The side air bags and curtain and roll over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact rear im pact or lower severity side collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 57 AWARNING The seat belts the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflate with great force Do not allow
126. the instrument 5 Highlight a category using the NISSAN con can navigate the command list menu As an alternative to the voice command Help you may access the command list using the fol lowing steps panel Highlight the Others key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button Highlight the Voice Recognition key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button troller and press the ENTER button The command list for the category selected is shown If necessary scroll the screen using the NISSAN controller to view the entire list Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen NOTE You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say Help 4 Highlight the Command List key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button 4 132 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Alternate Command Mode command list Navigation Command Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 133 COMMAND ACTION Zoom In Changes the map scale to a smaller number Zoom Out Changes the map scale to a larger number Phone Command COMMAND ACTION Redial Makes a call to the last dialed number Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits 4 134 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Audio Command Satellite Radio Turns to the SAT band selecting the station last played Music B
127. the same as the front Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 75 vig SPEAKER CONTROL button Press this i button to turn the rear speakers off and headphones on Press this A button again to turn rear seat speakers back on and headphones off MODE button The MODE button allows the rear passengers to change between AM FM CD DVD and AUX The media options are listed on the face plate of the rear audio controls When a source of media is selected the media label will be illuminated SEEK button In AM or FM mode the SEEK button allows the rear seat passengers to find the next radio station up or down the station band frequency In CD mode the SEEK button allows the rear passengers to find the next or previous selection on the CD NEXT button When the NEXT button is pressed while in AM or FM mode the radio will change to the next preset The NEXT button does not function while in SAT radio mode or when playing a DVD or CD ANTENNA Window antenna The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear passenger and driver side windows A CAUTION Do not place metalized film near the rear driver or passenger side window glass or attach any metal parts to it This may cause poor reception or noise When cleaning the inside of the rear driver or passenger side window be careful not to scratch or damage the window antenna Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft c
128. the sound of the exhaust system d You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system un derbody or rear of the vehicle THREE WAY CATALYST The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system Exhaust gases in the three way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants AWARNING The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys tem are very hot Keep people animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire A CAUTION e Do not use leaded gasoline Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re duce the three way catalyst s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants Keep your engine tuned up Malfunc tions in the ignition fuel injection or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst causing it to overheat Do not keep driv ing if the engine misfires or if notice able loss of performance or other un usual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the three way catalyst Do not race the engine while warming it up Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine ON PAVEMENT AND OFF ROAD DRIVIN
129. to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 6 After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted the ALR mode child restraint mode is canceled FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions WRS0799 Forward facing web mounted step 2 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors 3 The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit See Head restraint adjustment in this section for head restraint ad justment information Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0800 Forward facing rigid mounted step 2 If the seating position does not have an adjust able head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating posi tion or a different child restraint 1 43 LRSO671 Forward facing step 4 4 F
130. turer for the possible influences before use The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communi cation systems Do not operate the In telligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unin tentionally when the unit is stored for a flight The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse The operating environment and or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key 3 12 Pre driving checks and adjustments A CAUTION Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intel ligent Key transmits weak radio waves Environ mental conditions may interfere with the opera tion of the Intelligent Key under the following operating conditions When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted such as a TV tower power station and broadcasting station When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio When the Intelligent Key is in
131. vehicle 2 Apply and hold the brake pedal 3 Shift the transmission into gear 4 Release the parking brake Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks Apply and hold the brake pedal Have someone retrieve and store the blocks While going downhill the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de crease overall stability Therefore to main tain adequate control reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descend ing a hill as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating Shifting to a lower gear instead provides engine brak ing and reduces the need to brake as fre quently If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this owner s manual Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle s first 500 miles 805 km For the first 500 miles 805 km that you do tow do not drive over 50 MPH 80 km h Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide When making a turn your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels To compensate for this make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn
132. we ek HA 2 41 Glove box lock 0000 00a 2 41 H Hands free phone system Bluetooth 4 92 4 107 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 30 Headlight control switch 2 30 Headlights lt a ke oe we a me Dae radia 8 28 Headphones See NISSAN mobile entertainment system 4 80 Heated seats 02 0008 2235 Heated steering wheel 2 35 Heater Heater and air conditioner controls 4 36 Heater operation 4 37 Rear seat air conditioner 4 38 HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 58 Hoodrelease 2 0008 3 23 Hook Luggage hook 2 47 HOW soca pee Ge Lee eae See A 2 34 l Ignition switch aoaaa aaa 5 9 Immobilizer system 2 27 3 4 5 12 Important vehicle information label 9 11 In cabin microfilter oaoa aaa aaa 8 17 Increasing fuel economy 5 20 Indicator lights and audible reminders See warning indicator lights and audible reminders aooaa we ew Saw Ow 9 13 Inside automatic anti glare mirror 3 32 Inside mirror 2 ee 3 32 Instrument brightness control 2 33 Instrument panel 0 6 2 2 Instrument panel dimmer switch 2 33 Intelligent Key system Key operating range 3 14 Key operation 25 3 15 Mechanical key 2 022 ee eee 3 3 Remote keyless entry operation
133. wheel nuts when the ve hicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 98 ft lb 133 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times It is recom mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure COLD pressure After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure the display of the tire pres sure information may show higher pres sure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km This is because the tire pressure increases as the tire temperature rises This does not indicate a system malfunc tion 5 Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip ment in the vehicle In case of emergency 6 7 AWARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se cured after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop The spare tire is designed for emer gency use See specific instructions un der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenan
134. with a spare tire as soon as possible See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors A CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts antenna etc on the windows This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors and the TPMS will not function properly Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu minate Some examples are Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle lf a computer or similar equipment or a DC AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party r
135. 0 ap LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for UPS COMPO CU ken conceeeseccacuecdess a E 1 5 And row beiich seat adiusimeni CHildren System TEn re if so equipped oc ccs csetuwete es enewenawhawnwss 1 6 Rear facing child restraint installation using PUMMCSIS 24 careawetenns Come avecueeavaesen eetas 1 8 sA aor De ae ee ee Rear facing child restraint installation using Head FESWAINIS sct cecudstwrenten teat deecetowe se 1 8 h Adjustable headiest Gree Squipead 1 19 the seat bells scccvcaeSeureetedadetewwewade o oes RR ee Forward facing child restraint installation Flexible Sealing sr sncskosemeknennenetaddame tats 1 15 using LATCH 3rd row power folding seats if so equipped 1 20 Forward facing child restraint installation Seat belts al eae gia oie a er E 1 21 using the seat beltS ccc ccc aLL LLL Precautions on seat belt usage 1 21 Installing top tether strap Pregnant women iis ss cnaveh wc se ened een on dent 1 24 2nd row captain s chairs or 2nd row bench NEG pers n S eeaeancesces cee oneseeaean ape es 1 24 seat if so equipped Jviscscusenreneewsamanares Three point type seat belt with retractor 1 24 Installing top tether strap Seat belt extenders 0c cee cee cee eeeeeas 1 30 3rd row bench Seat cece cece eee eee eeee Seat belt maintenance eee00000e 1 30 Booster S atS 66c4cc0000sesuae eeevewwdeeres Supplemental restraint system 0 000000e 1
136. 000 lbs Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight distributing hitch system NOTE A weight distributing hitch system may af fect the operation of trailer surge brakes If you are considering use of a weight distributing hitch system with a surge brake equipped trailer check with the surge brake hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done Follow the instructions provided by the manufac turer for installing and using the weight distributing hitch system General set up instructions are as follows 1 Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and the doors closed allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level 2 Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper 9 22 Technical and consumer information height is within O 5 inches 0 13 mm of the reference height measured in step 2 The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2 AWARNING Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded the vehicle may handle unpredictabl
137. 1 Rear audio controls 2 4 4 o6 0046 a 4 4 75 Rear center seat belt 1 27 Rear power windows a aosa aaa 2 52 Rear seat airconditioner 4 38 Rear sonar system 5 31 Rear sonar system off switch 2 36 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIG aa i e e k oot ae ee ee 2 30 Rear window wiper and washer switches 2 29 RearView Monitor oaoa aaa aa 4 33 Recorders Event data aoaaa a 9 32 Refrigerant recommendation 9 7 Registering your vehicle in another country 9 10 Remote controller See NISSAN mobile entertainment system aoaaa aaa 4 79 Remote keyless entry system 3 7 Reporting safety defects US only 9 31 Resetting the fuel economy aasa 4 5 4 21 ROOTTACK 2 4 4 2a a e ee ee d a 2 49 S Safety Child safety rear door lock 3 7 Child seat belts 1 32 1 40 1 45 1 50 Reporting safety defects US only 9 31 Screen See NISSAN mobile entertainment SYSE sse saso Oot ck amp AW Ge ee A 4 79 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment 1 2 Front power seat adjustment 1 4 Second row bench seats 1 6 Second row captain s chair 1 5 Third row power folding seats 1 20 Seat belt Child safety 6 0 am ot wate ew we Eo 1 31 Infants and small children 1 31 Injured Person 44408446 4e ws 1 24 Larger childrens see a ae a on ee we 1 32 Precautions on sea
138. 16 4 2 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water To clean the display never use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel e Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition switch in the ON or ACC position for a long time it will discharge the battery and the engine will not start Reference symbols ENTER button This is a button on the control panel Display key This is a select key on the screen By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function HOW TO USE THE NISSAN CONTROLLER Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on the display screen Select an item on the display using the main directional buttons or the center dial Then press the ENTER button to select the item or perform the action The BACK button 4 has two functions e Go back to the
139. 205 2 55 WIiGhtDUIDS 2 0 knees he ae eee A 8 28 Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Low washer fluid warning light 2 24 10 4 Passenger air bag and status light 1 62 Personal lights 2 57 Security indicator light 2 19 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 0 002 eee 2 13 Lights Map lighis lt ss 0 6 4 6 oe hee cawe 2 57 Lock Child safety rear door lock 37 Door locks soea oo ma a a m8 a 3 5 Glove box lock 2 41 Lift gate release nonna aaa 3 27 Power door locks 3 6 Low fuel warning light 2 16 2 18 2 24 Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Low washer fluid warning light 2 24 Luggage hook 24 242 Fhe we ae ws 2 47 Luggage rack see roof rack 2 49 Luggage See vehicle loading information 9 13 Luggage storage see vehicle loading information 2 47 Maintenance Changing the maintenance interval 2 ee ee 4 8 4 24 Displaying the maintenance notice reminder 6 we wk ee ww ww 4 8 4 24 General maintenance 8 2 Inside the vehicle 8 3 Maintenance precautions 8 5 Outside the vehicle 8 2 Resetting the maintenance interval 4 8 4 24 Seat belt maintenance 1 30 SWNG 6 2 8 Amik oe we eS 4 7 4 23 Under the hood and vehicle 8 4 Malfunction indicator light 2 19 Manual front seat
140. 53 Supplemental air bag warning labels 1 67 Precautions on supplemental restraint Supplemental air bag warning light 1 68 SV Stel toad EE TETEE E E E E 1 53 SEATS Sit upright and well back AWARNING e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly See Precau tions on seat belt usage later in this section After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 1 2 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the pas senger sits well back and straight up in the seat If the seatback is reclined the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased A CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions be sure no
141. 6 5 4 2 Idle speed A T in N position Ignition timing degree B T D C at idle No adjustment is necessary speed CO at idle Standard Model FFV Model DILFR5A 11 DILFR5A 11D Spark plug gap Nominal in mm 0 043 1 1 Spark plug Camshaft operation Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES 002 9 8 Technical and consumer information WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Wheels Overall length in mm 907 7 5 275 18 x 8 0JJ Overall width in mm 79 5 2 020 20 x 8 0JJ Overall height Tires 2wd with roof rack in mm 77 5 1 967 P265 70R18 4wd with roof rack in mm 78 3 1 988 P275 60R20 Front Track Spare tire Full size 18 inch tire in mm 67 9 1 725 20 inch tire in mm 68 1 1 729 Rear Track 18 inch tire in mm 67 9 1 725 20 inch tire in mm 68 1 1 729 Wheelbase in mm 123 2 83 130 Gross vehicle weight rating lb kg See the F M V S S C M Gross axle weight rating V S S certification label on the center pillar be Front Ib kg tween the driver s side Rear lb kg front and side doors Technical and consumer information 9 9 WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve hicle in another country you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi cle s engine Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage All gasoline vehicles mus
142. 662 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 127 You can only say a phone number using the 3 3 4 grouping 7 digits and 10 digits using Voice Recognition gt Dial Number de Voice Recognition gt Dial Number this command Please use the International Call command for all other formats and E 80 0662 Er 800 662 6200 when special characters such as star pound and plus need to be entered Change Number w Change Number f you say Change Number during phone number entry the system will automatically request that you repeat the number using Say the last four digits or Say Change Number the 3 3 4 format In this case please say the area code first and then follow the prompts To exit hold the TALK switch To exit hold the TALK switch Do not add a 1 in front of the area code when speaking phone numbers lf the system does not recognize your com 8 The system announces Please say the last 10 The system announces Dial or Change mand please try repeating the command four digits or say change number Number using a natural voice Speaking too slow or u too loudly may further decrease recognition 9 6200 Dial Say 11 Say Dial performance 12 The system makes a call to 800 662 6200 NOTE You can also speak 800 662 6200 10 continuous digits or 662 6200 7 con tinuous digits if the area
143. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Technical and consumer information 9 29 AWARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B and C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and exces sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law 9 30 Technical and consumer information AWARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading ei ther separately or in combination can cause heat build up and possible tire failure EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties For USA 1 Emission Defects Warranty 2 Emissions Performance Warran
144. AN Differential Oil Hyponoid Super GL 5 80W 90 or API GL 5 Viscosity SAE 80W 90 9 API GL 5 Synthetic 75W 90 gear oil or equivalent 10 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Antifreeze or equivalent FUEL RECOMMENDATION without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 A CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door label can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC specifi cations where it is available Many of the automo bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppl
145. AN Matic S ATF If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used e Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora tion in driveability and automatic trans mission durability and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment POWER STEERING FLUID The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122 176 F 50 80 C or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera tures of 32 86 F 0 30 C If the fluid is at or below the MIN line add Genu ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX depending on system fluid temperature Remove the cap and fill through the opening Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 A CAUTION DO NOT OVERFILL e Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent Genuine 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself BRAKE FLUID For further brake fluid specification information refer to Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual A WARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con tainer Old inferior or contaminated fluid may da
146. ASSENGER COMPARTMENT Rear ventilators P 4 35 Storage P 2 40 DVD entertainment system if so equipped P 4 76 Moonroof if so equipped P 2 54 Map lights P 2 57 Sun visors P 3 31 HomeLink P 2 58 Glove box P 2 41 Seats P 1 2 Cup holders P 2 44 Luggage storage P 2 47 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 5 INSTRUMENT PANEL 181716 15 27 25 22 20 26 0 6 Illustrated table of contents 12 13 14 15 Vents P 4 35 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn signal switch P 2 30 Instrument brightness control P 2 33 Steering wheel switch for audio control hands free Bluetooth phone if so equipped P 4 73 Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 53 P 2 34 Meters gauges and warning indicator lights P 2 4 2 13 Cruise control main set switches P 5 18 Windshield wiper washer switch and rear window wiper washer switch P 2 28 P 2 29 Ignition switch P 5 9 Display screen Display screen with navigation system if so equipped P 4 2 P 4 17 Navigation system controls if so equipped P 4 17 Audio system controls P 4 39 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 53 Glove box P 2 41 Hazard lights P 2 34 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
147. ATION keys 17 BACK button 18 NUMERIC KEYPAD REMOTE CONTROL FLIP DOWN SCREEN A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water The screen rotates down to view and up into the housing to store when not in use Ensure that the screen is latched securely into the housing when stored The flip down screen has a wireless remote con trol receiver 1 located at the bottom of the screen Refer to Remote control operation later in this section for the function of each button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 79 Headphones Power ON OFF Press the power button to turn the headphones on or off Volume control Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol ume The headphones will automatically be turned off in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that period To prevent the battery from being dis charged keep the power supply turned off when not in use NOTE For optimum infrared headphone perfor mance increase the volume on the rear seat controller to the maximum level and adjust the infrared headphone volume us ing the volume control on the headphones Using a lower volume setting on the rear seat controller can cause static noise
148. Audible reminders 2 20 FUGIO SYSICNI s w s a cuce do Ow wd ee a 4 39 Compact Disc CD changer 4 50 Compact disc CD player 4 58 Audio System CompactFlash CF player 4 60 Audio system FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD Changal oe siron bee eae eee o 4 47 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD PIVOT oe ag he A ae ad ee Ge ae 4 55 Audio System Music Box hard disk drive audio SySteM 4 4 meek ee Re my ak ee 4 62 Audio system ogo astieese ness Bae eteaa 4 39 Rear audio controls 4 75 Audio System Settings nese hee ee wee Os 4 47 4 55 Audio system Steering wheel audio control switch 4 73 Autolight switch s c s es saaa a Om Be 2 31 Automatic Automatic drive positioner 3 36 Automatic power window switch 2 52 Automatic transmission position indicator light amp ba wm Ge wim we wee amp ed 2 25 Driving with automatic transmission 5 14 Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 32 Automatic door locks a 6446 oe 46 ee 3 6 Automatic transmission fluid temperature ga ge ase Baten Rte e hehe ee oS 2 9 AUX jack 2 ee ee 4 53 4 60 B Battery ieee ee Se ee ee ee 8 13 Charge warning light 2 15 Before starting the engine 5 12 Belt See drive belt 8 16 Bluetooth hands free phone SYSICM s tees HS ee ER ew a 4 92 4 107 Booster seats oe eb eee Od 1 50 Brake Anti loc
149. Automatic transmission P Park position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in the P Park position without applying any brakes Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera tion If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur ther than normal the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop see a NISSAN dealer immediately Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied Parking brake Check the parking brake opera tion regularly The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied If the parking brake needs adjustment see a NISSAN dealer Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters seatback recliner etc to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks if so equipped hold securely in all latched positions Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely Check the belt web bing for cuts fraying wear or damage Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer ing system such as excessive freeplay hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and chimes Mak
150. DURES All mode 4WD system provides 4 positions AUTO 2WD 4H and 4LO so you can select the desired drive mode according to the driving conditions 2WD or 4WD shift procedure Starting and driving 5 21 AWD Shift Wheels Daven Indicator Light Switch Position AWD shift Transfer 4LO position Gro Rear wheels or 4 IRI wheels Fad 4 May blink M Rear wheels ka 4 wheels THI For driving on paved or slippery roads For driving on dry paved roads Economy drive or state dyna mometer I M testing For driving on rocky sandy or snow covered roads Neutral disengages the auto matic transmission mechanical parking lock which will allow the vehicle to roll Do not leave the transfer shift position in Neutral 2 Move the 4WD switch 2WD lt gt AUTO lt gt 4H AWD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift po sition engaged IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFT SE LECTOR TO THE N POSITION IN THIS OPERATION PERFORM THIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift selector to the N position 3 Push the 4WD shift switch and move it to 4LO or 4H with the brake pedal depressed YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WD SHIFT SWITCH BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO OR 4LO TO 4H UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE SHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL 3 4 wheels For use when maximum power and traction is required for Illuminated example
151. Economy 8 00 Distance To Empty kk KK mile Average Fuel Economy Fuel Economy 1 9 8 Ga Fuel Economy Record Fuel economy Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy Record Distance to empty MI or km The Distance To Empty DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds When the fuel level is low the DTE display will change to NOTE If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small the dis play just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position may con tinue to be displayed When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momentarily change the display Average fuel economy MPG or L 100 km The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1 3 mi 500 m After a reset or connecting the battery kk cables the display might show Resetting fuel economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0 Press the INFO button and select the Fuel Economy key then select the Reset key using
152. F 20 C the system will heat the steering wheel to approximately 86 F 30 C then turn off automatically Instruments and controls 2 35 Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel off manually The indicator light will go off NOTE The heated steering wheel switch is equipped with a 30 minute timer After the switch has been activate for 30 minutes the system will automatically turn off lf the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68 F 20 C when the switch is turned on the system will not heat the steering wheel This is not a malfunction 2 36 Instruments and controls VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system on for most driv ing conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The Bee indicator will come on Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving section REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH if so equipped A WARNING The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper bac
153. FSS is not a substitute for proper driving procedures Read and understand the limitations of the front sonar system as contained in this section Inclement weather may af fect the function of the FSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground If your vehicle sustains damage to the front bumper fascia leaving it mis aligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measure ment of obstacles or false alarms The Front Sonar System FSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the front bumper when the shift selector is in a forward gear The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The FSS detects obstacles up to 3 ft 1 0 m from the front bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 12 in 80 0 cm away the tone will sound con tinuously If the FSS detects a stationary or re ceding
154. G After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row The outboard seating positions on the 2nd row bench seat can be tipped forward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row bench seat To enter the 3rd row 4 lift up on the seatback latch located on the upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd row bench seat and fold the seatback forward at an angle over the seat base This will release the back of the seat so it may be tipped forward Then lift up on the lower corner of the seat base and tip the outboard seating position of the 2nd row bench seat forward To exit the 3rd row bench seat lift up on the same seatback latch and fold the seatback forward onto the seat base Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 7 ARMRESTS To use the armrests pull them down
155. G PRECAUTIONS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles They have higher ground clearance than passen ger cars to make them capable of performing ina variety of on pavement and off road applications This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems However they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to per form satisfactorily under off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns at high speeds As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Be sure to read the driving safety precautions later in this section TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As
156. GING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions be low Stopping the vehicle 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic 2 Turn on the hazard warning flashers 3 Park ona level surface and apply the parking brake Move the shift selector to P Park 4 Turn off the engine 5 Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance 6 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from traffic and clear of the vehicle AWARNING Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the automatic transmission is shifted into P Park Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery areas This is hazardous Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Wait for profes sional road assistance Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks 1 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire 2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up AWARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury Getting the spare tire and tools orooro e Lift the luggage board in the cargo area and remove the jack tool kit A from the storage area See Cargo area storage bin in the Instruments and controls section Remove the cargo area storage bin cover See
157. ING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle all State Provincial in Canada and local regulations for towing must be followed Incorrect towing equipment could dam age your vehicle Towing instructions are avail able from a NISSAN dealer Local service opera tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions AWARNING Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck A CAUTION When towing make sure that the trans mission axles steering system and powertrain are in working condition If any of these conditions apply dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used Always attach safety chains before towing For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle RV refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual In case of emergency 6 11 Two wheel drive models If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater remove the propeller shaft before towing NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed to prevent damage to the transmission with the driving rear wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as i
158. INTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au tomatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The ignition switch is placed in the ON po sition the next time the vehicle will be driven To return to the previous display after the MAIN TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed press the BACK button The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met The Reset key is selected The Interval Reminder ON key is set to OFF indicator light not illuminated The maintenance interval is set again Information gt Others 8 00 Sack i Voice Recognition 34 Navigation Version Show voice recognition settings Other items Press the INFO button and select the Others key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button to view information on the naviga tion and voice recognition systems Voice recognition For Voice Recognition settings refer to NISSAN Voice Recognition system if so equipped later in this section Navigation version Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Traffic Info Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Where am I Refer to the separate Navigation System Own e
159. Incoming call adjusting this setting allows you to hear a difference in volume Outgoing call adjusting this setting allows the person you are talking with to hear a difference in volume To access the settings press the SETTING but ton then highlight Volume and Beeps using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button You can also adjust the volume of an incoming voice during a call by pushing the volume control switch on the steering wheel or by turning the volume control knob on the instrument panel Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 117 NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM if so equipped NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands free operation of the systems equipped on this ve hicle such as phone and vehicle information There are two voice recognition modes of opera tion available They are Standard Mode e Alternate Command Mode In Standard Mode the factory default setting commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system You can complete your desired operation by simply following the prompts given by the system In this mode hands free operation of Audio Climate Control and Display is not available through NISSAN Voice Recognition For advanced operation you can change to an Alternate Command Mode that enables the op eration of the display audio and climate control through NISSAN Voice Recognition When this mode is act
160. M stereo indicator ST will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception TUNE FLDR Tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FLDR knob to the right or left EE gt SEEK CAT and TRACK tuning buttons Press the SEEK CAT 4 button or the TRACK gt button for less than 1 5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequen cies and stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN tuning Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station PRESET A B C Station memory opera tions 18 stations can be set for the FM AM and SAT satellite if so equipped radio to the A B and C preset button in any combination of FM AM or SAT stations 1 Choose preset bank A B or C using the PRESET A B C select button 2 Select the desired FM AM or SAT station band 3 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 4 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 5 Other buttons can be set in the sam
161. NG The three point seat belt with Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child ina sudden stop or collision Also it can change the operation of the front pas senger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section When installing a child restraint system in the rear center position both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured See Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt in this section WRS0256 Rear facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats 1 Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the restraint manufacturer s instructions WRS0761 Rear facing step 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing LRSO669 Rear facing
162. ON OFF switch on The CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate To set cruising speed accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your vehicle maintains the set speed To pass another vehicle depress the ac celerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle returns to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills If this happens drive without the cruise control To cancel the preset speed use one of the following three methods Pushthe CANCEL button the SET indicator light in the vehicle information display goes out Tap the brake pedal the SET indicator light goes out Push the ON OFF switch off Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the vehicle information display go out The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the vehicle information display goes out if you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL RES or SET COAST switch The preset speed is deleted from memory the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH 13 km h below the set speed you move the shift selector to N Neutral To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following three methods Depress the accelerator pedal
163. Odometer Twin trip odometer The odometer twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The odometer records the total distance the ve hicle has been driven The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips Changing the display Pushing the change button changes the display as follows Trip A Trip _ B_ Odometer only Elapsed time driving distance and average speed information is also available for vehicles with navigation system Refer to Control panel buttons in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition system Elapsed time driving distance and average speed information is also available for vehicles with navigation system if so equipped Refer to Instruments and controls 2 5 Control panel buttons in the Display screen heater air conditioner and audio systems sec tion later in this manual 2 6 Instruments and controls TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo lutions per minute rom Do not rev the engine into the red zone 1 A CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone shift to a higher gear or reduce en gine speed Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera ture The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points withi
164. Restraints properly as described in this section ADJUSTABLE HEADREST if so equipped AWARNING The adjustable headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against in jury in certain rear end collisions Adjust the headrests properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the adjustable headrest stalks or remove the adjustable headrests Do not use the seat if the adjustable head rests have been removed Failure to fol low these instructions can reduce the ef fectiveness of the adjustable headrests This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with adjustable headrests All of the headrests are adjustable E Indicates the seating position is equipped with an adjustable headrest Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or adjustable headrest 1 12 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system as LRS0888 Components Adjustment To raise the headrest pull it up 1 Adjustable headrest Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the 2 Adjustment notches center of the seat occupant s ears 3 Lock knob 4 Stalks Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 13 LRS0889 To lower push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down
165. S ene Nene The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Carry the Intelligent Key with you When pushing the door handle request The outside chime sounds for approximately A door is not closed securely Close the door securely switch to lock the door 2 seconds The door handle request switch is pushed _ Push the door handle request switch after before the door is closed the door is closed 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments HOOD 4 Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel The hood will spring up slightly 2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood When closing the hood lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place AWARNING Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving Fail ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment to avoid injury do not open the hood LIFT GATE AWARNING Always be sure the lift gate has been closed securely to prevent it from open ing while driving Do not drive with the lift gate open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattende
166. SV mode from OFF to 5 press the SETTING button Then select the Audio key using the NISSAN controller then press the EN TER button The audio settings screen will be displayed Select the key or key then press the ENTER button to change the SSV While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by selecting the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the BACK button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 47 Settings gt Audio 12 00 Bass L aa l Treble TMM Balance M e Fade Uaa iil Eront i Push ENTER to adjust setting For information on how to use the NISSAN con troller see How to use the NISSAN controller earlier in this section Settings gt Audio 12 00 Precision Phased Audio 5 6 Enhaces stereo imaging and sound Precision phased audio if so equipped To turn on or off the precision phased audio press the SETTING button Select the Audio key using the NISSAN controller then press the ENTER button the audio settings screen will be displayed Select the Precision Phased Audio key then press the ENTER button If the amber indicator light is displayed the precision phased audio is enabled Pressing the ENTER button again will turn off the precision phased audio the indicator light will disappear When this item is
167. TE CONTROL OPERATION For all operation precautions see Before oper ating the DVD Mobile Entertainment System earlier in this section 4 86 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The DVD system can also be controlled by using the remote controller in the rear seats See the following items PWR on off button With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON position press the PWR button to turn the DVD rear display on or off NOTE The PWR button on the remote control only turns the rear display on or off Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side facing up The DVD will be guided automatically into the slot If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted the DVD player will automatically turn on A CAUTION Do not force the compact disc into the slot This could damage the player MODE select button Press the MODE button to select Audio Video source between DVD and AUX input input jacks on the faceplate Red right channel audio input White left channel audio input and Yellow Video input The display will show the AUX in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds once the Mode is changed to AUX To use the input jacks refer to Auxiliary input jacks in this section pin When the gt PLAY button on the remote control is pressed the player will play In play mode the display will briefly show gt on the upper left corner of the disp
168. TOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manu facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information FCC Notice This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Opera tion is subject to the following two condi tions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation This transmitter has been tested and com plies with FCC and DOC MDC rules Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment DOC ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I D CV2V67690 Instruments and controls 2 61 MEMO 2 62 Instruments and controls 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments Keys E E E E A E TEE 3 2 NISSAN Intelligent Key if so equipped 3 2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys 3 4 DOCiS lt at hecwtewevase ive EE E ESA 3 5 LOCKING with key nad000 ueeeeennedets nee ded cacen 3 5 Locking with inside lock knob 0 05 3 6 Locking with power door lock switch
169. able at any _ i time Please use the Help command to get gt a Ozete information on how to use the system Say pound for Say star for avail CONTROL BUTTONS able when using the Call International command and the Send command during The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands a call Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel 4 PHONE SEND Press the 4 amp 4 button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming call Say plus for available only when using the Call International command Say pause for a 2 second pause available only when storing a phone book number N You can say star for and pound for at any time in any position of the phone number available only when using Call In ternational command You can also use the 4 button to skip through system feedback and to enter commands during a call See List of voice commands and During a call later in this section for more information 4 96 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems MODE PHONE END Press the 28E button to cancel a VR session or end a call GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition For ad ditional command options refer to List of voice commands later in this section Choos
170. adjustment 1 2 Manual vent windows a aoaaa aaa 2 53 Map lig iS 2 2 ota 42 oF ee oem ee o 2 57 Map POCKEl 2 ss s dew ana Be oe we we A 2 42 Meters and gauges 2 4 Instrument brightness control 2 33 Mirror Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 32 Inside MINO sa 4 Sew amp Bowe w ew a 3 32 Outside mirror control 3 34 Outside mirrors oe ce 8 ae ee ew we 3 34 Vanity MION s s a we kw ea ew ww 3 31 Music Box hard disk drive audio system 4 62 N NISSAN Intelligent Key 2 3 2 3 12 NISSAN mobile entertainment system MES eos oy ooo oe RE eee ew oe be 4 76 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 2 27 3 4 5 12 NISSAN voice recognition system 4 118 O Octane rating See fuel octane rating 9 4 Odometer 646 2464 84462 es Bee a oS 2 5 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants a ses ee aaa aaa 9 2 Changing engine oil aaau 8 9 Changing engine oilfilter 8 10 Checking engine oil level 8 8 ENGNG Ol tae neha RO we 8 8 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 6 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 15 Engine Oil VSCOSIY s s s e aeaeaie we wo 9 6 Outside mirror control 3 34 Outside mirrors 2 ee 3 34 Overheat If your vehicle overheats 6 10 Owner s manual order form 9 33 Owner s manual service manual order INFOMMAUON S
171. ain to open the door NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Locking doors OPERATION 1 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi You can lock or unlock the doors without taking tion place the ignition switch in the LOCK the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag position and make sure you carry the Intelli When you carry the Intelligent Key with you you gent Key with you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door 2 Close all doors handle request switch within the range of opera tion 3 Push any door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you 4 All doors and the rear liftgate will lock 5 The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 NOTE Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open However doors lock with the me chanical key even if any door is open Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you However when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle doors can be locked with an other Intelligent Key 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments A CAUTION After locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the do
172. al concerning the use of seats seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident Status light The front passenger air bag status light is located under the climate controls The light op erates as follows Unoccupied passenger s seat The is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Passenger s seat occupied by a small adult child or child restraint as outlined in this section The illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Occupied passenger seat and the passen ger meets the conditions outlined in this section The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera tional Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to auto matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U S regulations If the front passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a crash The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag 1 62 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system to certain front passenger seat occupants such as children by requiring the air bag to be auto matically turned OFF Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements On
173. aler can conduct it for you AWARNING Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic con ditions and obey all traffic laws 1 Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C Al low the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H normal oper ating temperature 2 Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH 88 km h then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds 3 Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 60 MPH 86 96 km h for at least 9 minutes 4 Stop the vehicle 5 Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH 55 km h and maintain the speed for 20 seconds 6 Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times 7 Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH 88 km h and maintain the speed for at least 3 min utes 8 Stop the vehicle Place the shift selector in the P Park or N Neutral position Technical and consumer information 9 31 9 Turn the engine off 10 Repeat steps 1 8 at least one more time If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted repeat the preceding step Any safe driving mode is accept able between steps Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed 9 32 Technical and consumer information EVENT DATA RECORDERS EDR This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain
174. ally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the compact disc DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play lt gt SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the SEEK CAT button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the TRACK P button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played The NISSAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks when a CD is being played lt SEEK CAT and TRACK Rewind Fast Forward Press and hold the SEEK CAT 4 rewind button or the TRACK fast forward button while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will play while rewindin
175. ameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1 16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight Additionally the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground Weight carrying hitches A weight carrying or dead weight ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver Weight distribution hitch This type of hitch is also called a load leveling or equalizing hitch A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight hitch weight of your trailer Many ve hicles can t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels This gives stability to the tow vehicle Technical and consumer information 9 21 A weight distributing hitch system Class IV is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5
176. ances stereo imag ing and sound HOW TO USE THE STATUS BUTTON To display the status of the audio climate control system and fuel consumption press the STATUS button The following information will appear when the STATUS button is pressed Audio Audio and climate control system Audio climate control temperature settings av erage fuel economy and distance to empty Audio Fuel Economy Tire Pressure Trip Computer Maintenance i View traffic information and settings Information 2 00 HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Press the INFO button The display screen shows vehicle information for your convenience The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle See the following for details Information gt Fuel Economy 12 00 0 miles 1 9 8 Ga Distance to Empty Average Fuel Economy Fuel Economy Record Fuel economy Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy Record Distance to empty MI or km The Distance To Empty DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds When the fuel level is low the DTE display
177. ane num ber 91 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For the best starting and vehicle driveability re sults do not continually switch between E 85 and unleaded regular gasoline If you must switch fuels NISSAN recommends the following do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full add more than 5 gallons of fuel operate the vehicle immediately after refuel ing for a period of at least 5 minutes NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard start ing and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuit able for use when ambient temperatures fall be low O F 18 C In the range of O F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for you engine to start and a deterioration in drivability sags and or hesita tions until the engine is fully warmed up Fuel consumption Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gal lon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your fuel mileage to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with etha nol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts A CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with
178. ange procedure 2 11 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 13 CHECKING DUDS sc svnrcnceumebeaneand enpeane ee ie 2 13 Waming ghis 226 voces mates ew reve ae resesi inii 2 14 indicator ighis 2 2c0cceased ceneeeee hence aitada 2 18 Audible reminders 000 eee eee eee 2 20 Vehicle Information Display 0 2 21 How to use the Vehicle Information Display 2 21 Security systemS c2ccctuseeethereeveedeasseaeerse 2 25 Vehicle security system ssssssusesrrrrrnnnns 2 25 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 2 27 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Switch operation ees scri seres siak tpr HNE rena 2 28 Rear window wiper and washer switch 2 29 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch 2 30 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 30 Headlight control switch 00 cee eee ee 2 30 Daytime running light system Canada only 2 32 Instrument brightness control 0005 2 33 Turn signal switch cine eens vena eetetaocanuncers 2 33 Fog light switch if so equipped 8 2 33 Hazard warning flasher switch 00 0000s 2 34 MOM su cestendences E etsy eanae ees 2 34 Heated seat if so equipped 0 cece eee eee 2 35 Heated steering wheel if so equipped 2 35 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch 2 36 Rear sonar system off switch if so equ
179. anging engine coolant 2 00 eeeee 8 8 ENGIN Ollie tewvteseetsenasepeseceeheaeeeuneaectas 8 8 Checking engine oil level 2 000 005 8 8 Changing engine oll 000 cece eee eee aes 8 9 Changing engine oil filter 0 2 00 8 10 5 speed automatic transmission fluid 8 11 Power steering fluid 200 eee eee eee 8 11 Proko NC scusencauraesesecemtes paleaceeeeeusauns 8 12 Brake HUI e sas s eu need ne be conewer wee eee wed 8 12 Window washer fluid 202200 eee eee 8 13 Window washer fluid reservoir 0 8 13 BAN y sone posse aes ee eee eee ee EEA 8 13 JUMP SING eds cteeeheceeseensenctet esas es 8 15 Variable voltage control system 8 15 Di Ae iE E cree E E E E 8 16 opak PUGS ss ssssre rensas oa emase aa ETa wens 8 16 Replacing spark plugS lt lt cscnndeeGonsersepaegs 8 16 Air cledha seeren prtann tAr a EA 8 17 ip cabin MICrof E cesars ne eeusanseesd e oas 8 17 Windshield wiper blades accc3 lt aevoweneeareeseeins 8 19 GleaninNg esperita ene i E EE E S EY 8 19 Replacing 24 422 ac524c065cecebendeeraces Ni 8 20 Eel e E E E E EEE A E E 8 22 PUSCS ase E eee ee eee eee ore eee E S 8 22 ENGiINe COMpPANMNents ssveknkGuudeeceveseusece 8 23 Passenger compartment 2 5 8 24 Battery replacement ccciexccescccesecseeu wees ase de 8 25 Keyfob if so equipped cece cece eee 8 26 NISSAN Intelligent Key if so equ
180. anti glare rearview mirror will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operat ing To turn off the anti glare feature press the button on the rearview mirror The indicator light will turn off To turn on the anti glare feature again press the button on the rearview mirror The in dicator light will turn on For information on the automatic anti glare rear view mirror see Automatic anti glare rearview mirror earlier in this section Heated mirrors The outside mirrors can be heated to defrost defog or de ice for improved visibility For addi tional information see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 35 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER if so equipped The automatic drive positioner system has two features Memory storage function Entry exit function 3 36 Pre driving checks and adjustments MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Two positions for the driver s seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory Follow these procedures to use the memory sys tem 1 Place the shift selector in the P Park posi tion 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Adjust the driver s seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switc
181. anual 3 34 Pre driving checks and adjustments OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position Rotate the round switch 1 to select the right or left mirror Adjust each mirror to the desired po sition pushing the round switch AWARNING Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear Be careful when moving to the right Using only this mirror could cause an accident Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects Do not adjust the mirrors while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Manual folding outside mirrors if so equipped Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it a cS Power folding outside mirrors if so equipped LPD0417 A CAUTION Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors Press the switch to open or close the mirrors Automatic anti glare outside mirrors if so equipped The outside mirrors will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles The automatic anti glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The automatic anti glare feature will be on when starting the vehicle The indicator light on the automatic
182. any drive position to reduce driver distraction Audio is available when a movie is played To view movies in the front display stop the vehicle in a safe location move the shift selector to the P Park position and apply the parking brake Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 77 1 2 3 EJECT button DVD slot Auxiliary input jacks DIGITAL VIDEO DISC DVD PLAYER CONTROLS 1 amp EJECT button When the amp button is pressed with the DVD loaded it will be ejected The display will show the eject symbol in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds once the amp button is pressed If the DVD is not loaded the display will show NO DISC If the DVD comes out and is not removed within 25 seconds it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it DVD slot Insert a DVD into the slot with the label side facing up The DVD will be guided automati cally into the slot Auxiliary input jack For information see DVD auxiliary input jacks later in this section 4 78 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems POWER button STOP button NEXT TRACK CHAPTER and PREVI OUS TRACK CHAPTER button TITLE button ENTER button 6 DISPLAY button 7 MODE button 8 SUBTITLE button 9 AUDIO button 10 ANGLE button 11 CLEAR button 12 PAUSE button 13 PLAY button 14 FAST FORWARD FAST REVERSE button 15 MENU button 16 NAVIG
183. ap to the towing hook In case of emergency 6 13 A WARNING e Stand clear of a stuck vehicle e Do not spin your tires at high speed This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged A CAUTION Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle or the towing hooks if so equipped Otherwise the vehicle body will be damaged Use the towing hook if so equipped only to free a vehicle stuck in sand snow mud etc Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the tow ing hook The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle Never pull the hook at an angle Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle 6 14 Incase of emergency Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the sus pension steering brake or cooling systems Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery Rocking a stuck vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use the following procedure 1 Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System VDC 2 Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions 3 Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires 4 Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back ward
184. ary to replace iridium tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer Fol low the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Do not service iridium tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap ping e Always replace spark plugs with rec ommended or equivalent ones AWARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re move the spark plugs An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer for assistance AIR CLEANER The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Mainte nance Guide When replacing the filter wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth To remove the air cleaner filter 1 Loosen the screw 2 Disconnect the electrical connector 3 Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleaner cover Remove the air cleaner filter NOTE After installing a new air cleaner make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and the screw is tightened AWARNING Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth ers to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops the flame if the engine backfires If it i
185. ased The daytime run ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position AWARNING When the daytime running light system is active tail lights on your vehicle are not on It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others ZON PUSH TRIP D INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the Dd 0 or AUTO position with auto lights activated Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru ment panel lights when driving at night TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal Q Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction When the turn is com pleted the turn signals cancel automatically Lane change signal 2 To signala lane change move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash but the lever does not latch FOG LIGHT SWITCH if so equipped To turn the fog lights on turn the headlight switch to the 2 position then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position the headlights must be on then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights off turn the fog light switch to the OFF position The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate The fog lights autom
186. asoline or any percentage of the two fuels com bined A CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL Engine oil with API Certification Mark Viscosity SAE 5W 30 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendation in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual COLD TIRE PRESSURE See Tire and Loading Information label The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver s door For additional information see Wheels and tires in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCEDURE During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km of vehicle use follow the recommendations outlined in the BREAK IN SCHEDULE information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual Follow these recommendations for the future re liability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life Printing December 2009 12 Publication No OMOE TAGOU2
187. ate key ring to avoid interference from other devices Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys tem CONT ASSY IMMOBILIZER ANT ASSY IMMOBILIZER This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including inter ference that may cause undesired opera tion of the device CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER S AUTHORITY TO OPER ATE THE EQUIPMENT Instruments and controls 2 27 LICO474 Security indicator light The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF or ACC position This function indicates the NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System is operational If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal functioning the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position If the light still remains on and or the en gine will not start see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser vice as soon as possible Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service 2 28 Instruments and controls WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and wash
188. ately 5 seconds ENTRY EXIT FUNCTION This system is designed so that the driver s seat will automatically move when the shift selector is placed in the P Park position This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver s seat more easily The driver s seat will slide backward When the key is removed from the ignition switch and the driver s door is opened When the driver s door is opened with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to LOCK with the driver s door open The driver s seat will return to the previous posi tion When the key is inserted into the ignition switch and the driver s door is closed When the driver s door is closed with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P Park position Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 37 The entry exit function can be adjusted or can celed For vehicles with navigation system see Comfort amp convenience settings in the Moni tor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual For vehicles without navigation system see your NISSAN dealer Restarting the entry exit function If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the entry exit function will be disabled Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the entry exit funct
189. atically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected instruments and controls 2 33 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH g LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi tions All turn signal lights flash A WARNING If stopping for an emergency be sure to move the vehicle well off the road Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic Turn signals do not work when the haz ard warning flasher lights are on 2 34 Instruments and controls The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving HORN To sound the horn push the center pad area of the steering wheel AWARNING Do not disassemble the horn Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tam pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury HEATED SEAT if so equipped The front seats are warmed by built in heaters if so equipped 1 Start the engine 2 Push the LO or HI position of the switch as desired depending on the temperature The indicator light in the switch will illuminate The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning
190. ation see NISSAN Voice Recog nition system if so equipped later in this section Stopping playback The system stops playing when Another mode radio CD CompactFlash or AUX is selected The audio system is turned off The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons Press the 4 SEEK CAT button while a track is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the gt TRACK button while a track is playing to skip to the beginning of the next track If you press and hold the SEEK CAT re wind button or the gt TRACK fast forward button for more than approximately 1 5 seconds the track will play while rewinding or fast forward ing When the SEEK CAT rewind button or the gt TRACK fast forward button is re leased the track will return to the normal playing speed The NISSAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks For more information on how to use the NISSAN controller see How to use the NISSAN control ler earlier in this section Play mode selection To change to another album or artist turn the TUNE FLDR knob SCAN RPT button Pressing the SCAN RPT button while a track is playing changes the play pattern as follows ALL Playlist RPT 1 Playlist RPT 1 TRK RPT ALL Playlist RDM 1 Playlist RDM ALL Playlist RPT ALL Playlist RPT the entire playlist will be re peated 1 Playlist
191. ay also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi cal from the steering wheel or instru ment panel Always use the seat belts 1 54 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us age then inflates the air bags Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor pressure sensor that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions This sensor is only used in this seat Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci dent See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section Keep hands on the outside of the steer ing wheel Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates Sit upright and well back AWARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in
192. b 6 500 Ib trailer tongue load specification recommended Maximum Towing Ca 2 948 kg 2 948 kg 2 948 kg by the trailer manufacturer If the tongue load pacity 1 2 A 9 100 lb 9 000 Ib 9 000 Ib becomes excessive rearrange the cargo to ob mie sae PARAJE 4 128 kg 4 082 kg 4 082 kg tain the proper pe ci ete ae not carn the vo tow packane 650b 650 Ib 650 b maximum tongue weight SPECIMCAUON shown in TER E packed 295 kg 295 kg 295 kg the Towing load specification chart even if the aad i ETI aon calculated available tongue weight is greater with tow package a 413 kg j 408 kg 408 ko than 15 If the calculated tongue weight is less g g g than 10 reduce the total trailer weight to 12 800 Ib 13 000 Ib 13 000 Ib j w o tow package match the available tongue weight ana 5 806 kg 5 897 kg 5 897 kg Combined Weight ani Bok Always verify that available capacities are within Rating with tow package eal me ea i 6 849 kg 6 849 kg 6 849 kg the required ratings 1 The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehi cle s maximum towing capacity 2 Use of a weight distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5 000 Ibs 9 20 Technical and consumer information TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Your vehicle may
193. between the front door finisher and the front seat Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates Right after inflation several side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems This is to prevent dam age to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or side panel This could affect proper operation of the curtain and rollover air bag systems Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing material near the seat backs or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers around the side air bag Work around and on the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The SRS wiring harnesses should not be modified or discon nected Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or cur tain and rollover air bag systems The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange
194. bumper The front and rear sonar system can be disabled by pushing the OFF switch When the system is disabled the indicator light on the switch will illuminate Push the switch again to enable the system The indicator light will go off The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position See Front sonar system in the Starting and driving section Instruments and controls 2 37 TOW MODE SWITCH POWER OUTLET For additional information refer to Tow mode in the Technical and consumer information sec tion later in this manual Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer load or light trailer light load will not cause any damage How ever fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission engine driving characteristics may feel unusual Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode The indicator light on the tow mode switch illumi nates when tow mode is selected Press the tow mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF Tow mode is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position 2 38 Instruments and controls LIC1193 Front row The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones The power outlets located on the driver s side of the instrument panel and in the lug
195. c Recorded Date Name Released Year and Artist and edit the details using the keypad displayed on the screen For information see How to use the touch screen earlier in this section Music Box System Info Displays the following information about the Music Box audio system Music Box Used Free Space Information about Saved Albums Saved Tracks and Remaining Time is displayed Mood Categories Number of saved tracks and their catego ries Relaxing Music Lively Music Slow Music Upbeat Music and Others are displayed Deleted Items Information about the deleted tracks is displayed Search Missing Titles If titles are not displayed for CDs that have been recorded titles can be ac quired using one of the following meth ods e Retrieve from HDD Searches the title using the database in the hard drive e Retrieve from CF Searches the title from the information acquired on the Internet Transfer Missing Titles to CF Transfers the information of the album re corded without titles to a CompactFlash card Visit www nissanusa com gracenote for details Music Box Settings For information see Music Box settings later in this section CDDB Version The version of the built in Gracenote Database is displayed Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 67 e Edit Info Edit the name of the track being played and Music Box gt Music Box System inf
196. c Control VDC off indicator light If any light fails to come on it may indicate a burned out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system Have the system repaired promptly Instruments and controls 2 13 WARNING LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display later in this section ABS 0 Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock func tion is turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec tion 2 14 Instruments and controls Automatic transmission check CHECK ae warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on for about 2 seconds If the light comes on at any other time it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer ATP Automatic transmission park warning light psz model AWARNING If the ATP light is ON this indicates that
197. ca tion purposes Yellow video input White left channel audio input Red right channel audio input Before connecting a device to a jack power off the portable device and turn off the DVD player To view something connected to the auxiliary input jacks press the DISC AUX button until the DVD mode appears then select the Settings key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button Then select the Switch to DVD AUX key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button The screen will change to the DVD AUX mode Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 85 R DVD AUX WIDE DVD AUX settings Select the Settings key using the NISSAN con troller and press the ENTER button to adjust the following settings Switch to DVD Select this key to switch back to the DVD mode Video Format If the auxiliary source is in a different video format select the keyorthe gt key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button and the video format will change gt DVD AUX Switch to DVD NTSC o Video Format Display Mode m Display Mode Choose from the Full Wide Normal or Cin ema mode by selecting the 4 key or the gt key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button When all the changes have been made press the BACK button to save all the settings REMO
198. callers is unclear ad justing the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve the clarity See Call volume later in this section REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions This device may not cause interference and this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause un desired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Xanavi Informatics Corporation VOICE COMMANDS You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System if so equipped later in this section Phone il n C co Call Phonebook Hi Pair phone foun cy
199. ce and do it yourself section of this manual 6 8 Incase of emergency JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery the instructions and precautions below must be fol lowed If the battery of a vehicle equipped with the NISSAN Intelligent Key is discharged the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position even when using the me chanical key or the valet key Connect the jumper cables to another vehicle as in the case of a discharged battery and then the ignition switch can be moved from the LOCK position Then jump start the ve hicle AWARNING If done incorrectly jump starting can lead to a battery explosion resulting in severe injury or death It could also damage your vehicle Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or painted surfaces Battery fluid is a cor rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns If the fluid should come into contact with anything imme diately flush the contacted area with water Keep battery out of the reach of children The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle Whenever working on or near a battery always wear suitable eye protectors for example goggles or industrial safety spectacles and remove rings
200. ck Reply Intelligent Key Unlock Reply Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit Return All Settings to Default 9 13 DOWN Intelligent Key Lock Reply Ont Cee Me m EA Remote Key Response Horn Select to turn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used when the LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed NOTE If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob the mode will not be changed with the display Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re enable the display control Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 29 Remote Key Response Lights Select to turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed NOTE If you change the horn beep or the light flash feature with the keyfob the mode will not be changed with the display Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re enable the display control Auto Re Lock Time Select to set the length of time before doors automatically re lock Selective Door Unlock When this item is turned on only the driver s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation When the door handle request switch on the driver s or front passenger s side door is pushed to be unlocked only the corresponding door is unlocked first All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within one minute When this item is turned to off all the doors will b
201. ck knob to the unlock position 2 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the lock position When locking the door this way be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle To unlock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the unlock position Lockout protection When the power door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition switch and any door open all doors will lock and then unlock automatically This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH 24 km h All doors unlock automatically when the ig nition switch is placed in the OFF position Intelligent Key equipped vehicles or when the key is removed from the ignition switch non Intelligent Key equipped vehicles The automatic lock and unlock functions can be deactivated or activated indepen dently of each other To deactivate or activate the automatic door lock or unlock system per form the following procedure 1 Close all doors 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Do one of the following within 20 seconds of performing Step 2 To change
202. cle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle Curb Weight actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment flu ids emergency tools and spare tire assembly This weight does not in clude passengers and cargo GVW Gross Vehicle Weight curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle pas sengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment This information is lo cated on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating maximum weight load limit specified for the front or rear axle This informa tion Is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GCWR Gross Combined Weight rating The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle passengers cargo and trailer Vehicle Capacity Weight Load limit Total load capacity maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the ve hicle This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer the trailer tongue weight must be in cluded as part of the cargo load This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information labe
203. code is not nec essary However the 3 3 4 digit grouping Is recommended for improved recognition See How to speak numbers earlier in this section 4 128 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Voice Recognition y Voice Recognition gt Phone ay Wy Phone Dial Number Navigation O Redial i O Information Phonebook Hep SSSSSSSSCSC S International Call WHA1109 LSU0017 Example 2 Placing an international call 2 The system announces Would you like to 4 Say International Call to the phone number 011 81 111 222 3333 access Phone Navigation Information or Help 1 Press the 4 switch located on the steering wheel 3 Say Phone Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 129 Lay Voice Recognition Be Say the entire number or groups of numbers Say 0 9 pound star or plus 5 To pause push the TALK switch 5 Say 011811112223333 3 Voice Recognition gt International call pr 011811112223333 Please continue or Say Dial Pushing the ENTER switch also dials the number 5 To pause push the TALK switch 6 Say Dial 7 The system makes a call to 011 81 111 222 3333 NOTE Any digit input format is available in the International Number input process as well as the special characters such as star pound and plus 4 130 Monitor climate audio phone and voice
204. coded with text is being used Depending on how the CD or MP3 WMA CD is encoded the following text might be able to be displayed by touching the Text key Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed File displays the name of the file currently playing Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name CD gt Text Folder XXXXXXX File XXXXXXX MpP3 Song Album Artist XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name e Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artist s name e Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur rently playing Track displays the name of the song on the CD currently playing Some of this text or modes might not display while playing a regular CD Press the BACK button to exit the CD text display screen FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM SAT band select Pressing the RADIO AM FM button will change the band as follows AM lt FM or SAT satellite if so equipped When the RADIO AM FM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON When the RADIO AM FM button is pressed the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satell
205. collisions and rollovers In a rollover crash an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt 5 6 Starting and driving OFF ROAD RECOVERY While driving the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface If this occurs maintain control of the vehicle by follow ing the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the con ditions of the vehicle road and traffic 1 Remain calm and do not overreact 2 Do not apply the brakes 3 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 4 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 5 If there is nothing in the way steer the ve hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced Do not attempt to drive the ve hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced 6 When it is safe to do so gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface When all tires are on the road surface steer the vehicle to stay in the ap propriate driving lane lf you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle road or traffic conditions gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
206. combined weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo plus the total trailer load Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling braking and performance The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads but also the places you plan to tow Tow weights appro priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations for example on slippery boat ramps Technical and consumer information 9 17 Temperature conditions can also affect towing For example towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating The engine protection mode which helps reduce the chance of engine damage could activate and automati cally decrease engine power Vehicle speed may decrease under high load Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load weather and road conditions AWARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a col lision Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of the road ina safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this
207. compass When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS 5 ABS Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light Automatic transmission check warning light Automatic transmission park warning light E324 model or Brake warning light Charge warning light BRAKE ATP E l Check suspension warning light if so equipped D Engine oil pressure low engine coolant tem perature high warning light CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed apply the parking brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine The following lights will come on if so equipped EA erae or O X SR A aww AWD warning light ZI Low fuel warning light Low tire pressure warning light Master warning light Z Seat belt warning light and chime r Supplemental air bag warning light Front passenger air bag status light The following lights come on briefly and then go off if so equipped ABS or N AT CK CHECK SUSP SLIP 3 1 DFE 1 SERVICE E SLIP High beam indicator light Blue O NGINE Malfunction indicator light MIL SOON Security indicator light Slip indicator light Turn signal hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynami
208. completely Refer to Vari able voltage control system in the Maintenance and do it yourself sec tion later in this manual Use electrical accessories with the en gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery 4 92 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can Bluetooth make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is paired to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connect ing procedure is required Your phone is auto matically connected with the in vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed
209. components and NISSAN Vehicle Im mobilizer System components Never leave these keys in the vehicle As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobi lizer System of your vehicle Since the registra tion process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer A CAUTION e Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intelligent Key e Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers Sy SPA1951 Mechanical key The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key which can be used in case of a discharged bat tery To remove the mechanical key release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key To install the mechanical key firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock kn
210. computer Press the INFO button then select the Trip Computer key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button The trip computer will display the following items Elapsed Time Journey time since the last reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59 minutes Driving Distance Distance driven mile or km since the last reset Average Speed Average speed driven MPH or km h since the last reset Resetting the trip computer Each item in the trip computer can be reset to O Select the Reset key on the item that needs to be reset using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button To reset all of the items in the trip computer select the Reset ALL key and press the ENTER button A confirmation screen will appear Select the Yes key and press the ENTER button Information gt Maintenance 12 00 da 0 eow 12000 18000 eT emaer fremas O mies Maintenance items Press the INFO button and select the Mainte nance key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button the maintenance infor mation will be displayed on the screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 7 12 00 Reset Distance E Interval d Information gt Reminder 1 Interval Reminder 0 8000 12000 18000 po mes Changing the maintenance interval Select one of the Reminder 1 4 keys using the NISSAN controller and pre
211. could tip or roll over Always back straight down in R Reverse gear and apply brakes to control your speed Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade resulting in loss of control and an acci dent Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain Prop erly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers 5 8 Starting and driving To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack and evenly distribute the load Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible Do not equip the ve hicle with tires larger than specified in this manual This could cause your ve hicle to roll over Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off road The steering wheel could move sud denly and injure your hands Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim Before operating the vehicle ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds With a higher center of gravity your NISSAN is more af fected by strong side winds Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires even with 4WD engaged For 4WD equipped vehicle
212. creen and press the ENTER button b Press the Se switch on the steering wheel c When the Call in Progress screen is dis played press the PHONE button on the instrument panel to hang up If any other screen is currently displayed press the PHONE button to display the Call in Progress screen first then press the PHONE button again to hang up There are different methods to make a call Select one of the following options instead of Call Phonebook in Step 2 above Redial Dial the previously dialed number again Call Call Logs Select the name or phone number from the incoming or outgoing call logs Call Downloaded Select the name or phone number from the downloaded cellular phonebook Dial Keypad Input the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen For infor mation on how to use the touch screen see How to use the touch screen earlier in this section Phone a 8 00 k gt 0 03 Cali in Progress XXXXXXX XXXXKXXXXX RECEIVING A CALL When you hear a phone ring the display will change to phone mode To receive a call follow one of the procedures listed below a Touch the Answer key on the display b Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel c Press the phone 4 button on the steering wheel switches There are some options available when receiving a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen Monitor cl
213. ction of this manual MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or per formance problems resulting from modi fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with out obligation IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual They are used in the following ways AWARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury To avoid or reduce the risk the procedures must be followed precisely A CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder ate personal injury or damage to your ve hicle To avoid or reduce the risk the pro cedures must be followed carefully If you see this symbol it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen amp If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra tion it means the arrow points to the f
214. cts are clear of the garage door gate etc that you are programming Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver PROGRAMMING HOMELINK 1 To begin press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons to clear the memory until the indicator light blinks after 20 seconds Release both buttons 2 Position the end of the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held transmitter but ton DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink This could take up to 90 seconds When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapidly flash ing light indicates successful programming To activate the garage door or other pro grammed device press and hold the pro grammed HomeLink button releasing when the device begins to activate 5 If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another
215. d Cd LRS0890 Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable headrests A WO N Pull the headrest up to the highest position Push and hold the lock knob Remove the headrest from the seat Store the headrest properly so it is not loose in the vehicle Install and properly adjust the headrest be fore an occupant uses the seating position 1 14 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Install 1 Align the headrest stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the headrest is facing the correct direction The stalk with the ad justment notches 4 must be installed in the hole with the lock button 2 Push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down Properly adjust the headrest before an oc cupant uses the seating position FLEXIBLE SEATING AWARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold down position In a collision people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significan
216. d children could become involved in seri ous accidents Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the lift gate Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 OPERATING THE MANUAL LIFT GATE if so equipped The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors including the lift gate simulta neously To open the lift gate pull up on the handle To close lower and push the lift gate down se curely 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments LPD0247 Rear pillar switch OPERATING THE POWER LIFT GATE if so equipped NOTE To open close or reverse the power lift gate the shift selector must be in P Park Also the power lift gate will not operate if battery voltage is low Additionally the glass hatch must be fully closed in order to open close or reverse the power liftgate LPD0283 Instrument panel switch Power Open The power lift gate automatically moves from the fully closed position to the fully open position in approximately 5 8 seconds The power open feature can be activated by the switch on the keyfob the instrument panel switch and by the outside opener handle The hazard lights flash and a chime sounds to indicate the power open sequence has been started The lift gate can be opened by the instru ment panel switch and the keyfob even if the vehicle is locked The lift gate will individually unlock and open Once the lift gate
217. d adjustments 3 9 Opening windows The keyfob allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simulta neously To open the windows press the but ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec onds after all doors are unlocked The door windows will open while pressing the button on the keyfob The door windows cannot be closed by using the keyfob Linking the keyfob to automatic drive positioner memory If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive positioner the keyfob can be linked to a memory setting See Automatic drive positioner later in this sec tion 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments Operating the power lift gate if so equipped Press and hold the button on the keyfob for about 0 5 seconds to open or close the lift gate The hazard warning lights flash and a chime sounds to indicate the power open or power close se quence has started The lift gate will reverse direction immediately during power open or power close if the keyfob button is pressed A chime will sound to an nounce the reversal For more information see Lift gate later in this section Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 2 button on the keyfob for longer than 0 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds The panic alarm stops when it has run
218. d are regis tered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Parental level parental control DVDs with the parental control setting can be played with this system Please use your own judgement to set the parental control with the system Disc selection You can play the following disc formats with the DVD drive e DVD VIDEO e VIDEO CD CD DA Conventional Compact Disc CD with MP3 WMA cannot be played Use DVDs with a region code 1 DVDs with region code ALL or 1 will operate in the DVD entertainment system The region code is dis played as a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD This vehicle installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a region code other than 1 or ALL Toggles on and off Display settings Front display To adjust the front display mode press the SET TING button while the DVD is being played select the Display key with the NISSAN control ler and then press the ENTER button To adjust the display ON OFF brightness tint color con trast and black level select each key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button Then you can adjust each item using the NISSAN controller After changes have been made press the BACK button to save the settings Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 81 Rear display To adjust the rear display mode press the DISP Display button on the remote controller To adjust the display brightness tint
219. d restraint adjustment removal and installation information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it Is interfering with the proper booster seat fit try another seating position or a different booster seat Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child s hips Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions for adjusting the seat belt routing Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top middle portion of the child s shoulder Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing Follow the warnings cautions and instruc tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three point type seat belt with retractor earlier in this section 1 52 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 7 If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System SRS sec tion contains important in
220. d tire wear NISSAN recommends driving in the 2WD or AUTO position under these conditions e The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am bient temperatures and the transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink even when the 4WD shift switch is shifted After driving for a while you can change the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4LO When driving on rough roads Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO 4H or 4LO Drive carefully according to the road surface conditions Starting and driving 5 23 When the vehicle is stuck Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO e f it is difficult to free the vehicle repeat forward and backward movement to in crease the movement f the vehicle is stuck deep in mud place stones or wooden blocks under the tires Then try the recovery procedures above Tire chains may be effective A CAUTION e Do not spin the tires excessively Tires will sink deep into the mud making it difficult to free the vehicle Avoid shifting gears with the engine running at high speeds as this may cause malfunction 4WD shift switch operations 5 24 Starting and driving Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the 2WD AUTO 4H or 4LO position depend ing on driving conditions With the switch set to the AUTO position distribution of torque to the front and rear wheels changes automatically depending on road conditions encountered ratio O 100 2WD
221. d to the memory switch the keyfob automatically re links Confirming memory storage Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the SET switch If the main memory has not been stored the indicator light will come on for approximately 0 5 seconds When the memory has stored the position the indicator light will stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds Ifthe battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the memory storage function will be canceled and must be restarted before a stored memory position can be set again Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the memory storage function You can also restart the memory storage function using the following procedure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position Once the memory storage function has been restarted you can store a memory position See Memory storage function earlier in this section Selecting the memorized position Set the shift selector to the P Park position then Within 45 seconds of opening the driver s door push the memory switch 1 or 2 or Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the memory switch 1 or 2 The driver s seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light blinking and then the light will stay on for approxim
222. de air bag or curtain and rollover air bag has inflated the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced Addition ally if any of the front air bags inflate the activated pretensioners must also be replaced The air bag module and pretensioner should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer The air bag module and pretensioner cannot be repaired The front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be in spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle o If you need to dispose of a supplemen tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incor rect disposal procedures could cause personal injury Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 69 2 Instruments and controls ISUMMENE PaNClecvenvcessdyceunerecededy Geese eked 2 2 Meters and gauges xis0 2cdecasnnsdeccend deerenece ss 2 4 Speedometer and odometer 0cceeeaees 2 5 TACNOMGIC s wasn cakeneecavecdocueavtaeiengeuend 2 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Fuel GAUGE seire daraa use See ehavhak veeeee nie ys 2 7 Engine oil pressure gauge 22 05 2 8 e e E E E pao pees mares 2 8 Automatic transmission fluid temperature a NN a c PEE S EE E E E reas 2 9 Compass display if so equipped 00e eee 2 9 Compass display 2 scctaG sense ens asccan ningi 2 10 Zone variation ch
223. ders e Before opening any door always look for and avoid oncoming traffic Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents LPD0240 Driver s side LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time Turning the key toward the front 4 of the vehicle locks all doors Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door From that position returning the key to neutral 3 where the key can only be removed and inserted and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors Opening and closing windows The driver s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto matic operation at the same time To open the windows turn the driver s door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked To close the windows turn the driver s door key to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked Windows stop when the key cylinder is released Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 5 LPD0241 Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the lock position then close the door To unlock the door without the key move the inside lo
224. des MPG Range Warning Rotate the INFO button 2 to highlight the de sired menu option within the selected mode Press the INFO button to enter the high lighted menu The icons at the bottom of the display screen show the options available ENTER Press the INFO button to select a highlighted option 2 NEXT Rotate the INFO button to high light an option Instruments and controls 2 21 gt SKIP gt DETAIL ENTER gt NEXT Warning mode The warning mode can be selected to view any warnings that may be present Once the screen is selected you have the option of skipping the warning or viewing it in detail Warnings can be present for issues such as an open door or low fuel For more information about potential warnings see Vehicle Information Dis play indicator lights and warnings later in this section 2 22 Instruments and controls WARNING aooi Ack m OPEN WARNING oo RANGE 003 MILES WARNING OD ons LOW Cee WASHER Vehicle information display warnings and indicators 1 Door and liftgate open warning 2 Lock warning NISSAN Intelligent Key model WARNING KEY PARNING RELEASE PARKING BRAKE 3 Low fuel warning 7 Shift P warning NISSAN Intelligent Key 4 Low windshield washer fluid warning model 5 No key warning NISSAN Intelligent Key model 9 Cruise set switch indicator 8 Cruise main switch indicator 6 Parking brake wa
225. ding slot by pressing the CD insert select button 1 6 then insert the CD To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer press and holdthe button for more than 1 5 seconds The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded with the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play EE gt SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the SEEK CAT button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the TRACK gt button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played The NISSAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks when a CD is being played lt SEEK CAT and TRACK Rewind Fast Forward Press and hold the SEEK CAT 4 rewind button or the TRACK fast fo
226. djusted us ing the brighter button or the dimmer button If no operation is done within 10 seconds the display will return to the previous display Press and hold the S 2 OFF button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off Press the button again to turn the display on 4 16 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped STATUS 13 gt 11 i ZOOM IN 10 STATUS button P 4 20 DEST button NISSAN controller P 4 18 PHONE button AOUN 9 BACK previous button P 4 18 10 ROUTE button 11 ZOOM IN button 12 MAP button 13 ZOOM OUT button For Navigation system control buttons refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual For information on the PHONE button see Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System later in this section When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will discharge the battery and the engine will not start Reference symbols ENTER button This is a button on the control 5 SD OFF brightness control button panel P 4 32 Display key This is a select key on the screen 6 INFO button P 4 21 By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function 7 SETTING button
227. does get on the camera window wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp ened with mild detergent diluted with water VENTS Adjust air flow direction for the driver s and pas senger s side vents 4 center vents 2 and rear passengers vents 3 and by moving the vent slide and or vent assemblies For the driver s and passenger s side vents 1 open or close by using the dial Move the dial toward the position to open the vents or toward the amp position to close them Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 35 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic Ss PS Se ee ee Driver s temperature control dial AUTO button A C ON OFF button j Fan speed control increase Front window defroster button e MODE button Passenger s temperature control dial DUAL button System OFF Fan speed control decrease Rear window defroster button Air recirculation button A WARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals 4 36 Monitor climate audi
228. down hooks located in the cargo area as shown The tie down hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps Do not apply a total load of more than 55 Ibs 245 N to a single plastic hook or 44 Ibs 196 N to a single plastic hook when securing cargo Do not apply a total load of more than 110 Ibs 490 N to a single metal floor tie down hook when securing cargo LTI0090 Cargo area floor tie down hooks AWARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area Secure any items in the cargo area Your child could be seri ously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged Technical and consumer information 9 15 e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could occur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR Doing so will exceed the GVWR AWARNING e Properly secure all carg
229. driver s door opening The low tire pressure warning light does not automati cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad justed After the tire is inflated to the rec ommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pres sure gauge to check the tire pressure For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The light will remain on after the 1 minute Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Main tenance and do it yourself section in this manual AWARNING If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch in the ON position have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible If the light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may per manently damage the t
230. e 4 There are also controls located on the rear quar ter trim panel behind the 3rd row seats passen ger s side Before operating the 3rd row seats Make sure the 2nd row seatback isn t re clined Lower the 3rd row headrest to the full down position Disconnect and secure the center seat belt and tongues into the retractor base See Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt later in this section Always reconnect the center seat belt when the seat Is returned to the upright position Make sure that there are no objects on the seatback cushion A CAUTION Make sure the seat s is returned to the full upright position before a passenger sits in the seat s When folding or returning the seat s to the upright position to avoid injury to yourself and others Make sure that the seat path is clear before moving the seat Be careful not to allow hands or feet to get caught or pinched in the seat 1 20 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system To fold down the 3rd row seats push and hold the bottom portion of the switch To raise the 3rd row seats push and hold the top portion of the switch A chime will sound three times to indicate the start of the operation A warning beep will sound 5 times if the seat isn t in the full upright or folded position when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position If the warning beep is still present after one comp
231. e automatically turned OFF for a short time the blower will continue to operate Engine power and under some conditions ve hicle speed will decrease Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but the vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed The transmission will downshift or upshift as it reaches prescribed shift points You can also shift manually As driving conditions change and engine coolant temperature is reduced vehicle speed can be increased using the accelerator pedal and air conditioning cooling function will automatically be turned back ON If 1 The engine coolant temperature is not re duced 2 The air conditioning cooling function does not turn back ON 3 The engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light illumi nates this may indicate a malfunction Move the vehicle off the road in a safe area and allow the engine to cool If after checking the oiland coolant the remains on do not continue to drive and call a NISSAN dealer The malfunction indicator light MIL may also come ON If only it remains on you do not need to have your vehicle towed but have it inspected soon by a NISSAN dealer See Malfunction in dicator light MIL in the Instruments and con trols section of this manual Starting and driving 5 13 AWARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than othe
232. e engine running Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2 wheel dynamometer such as the dynamometers used by some states provinces or territories for emissions testing or similar equip ment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury A CAUTION e Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads Driv ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise tire wear and increased fuel consumption If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads inthe 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N posi tion with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING PROCE
233. e s s e 2 9 ae os oe ew dod ee DS 9 33 Pp Parking Parking brake operation 5 17 Parking parking onhills 5 27 Pedal position adjustment 3 30 Personal lights 202 a aaa aaa 2 57 Phone Bluetooth hands free system 4 92 4 107 Power Power door locks 2 04 64 66ews oa 3 6 Power outlet 04 2 38 Power rear windows 2 52 Power steering fluid 8 11 Power steering system 5 28 Power vent windows 2 53 Power windows 4 2 50 Rear power windows 2 52 Precautions Maintenance precautions 8 5 On pavement and off road driving precautions 1 2 ee a ee es 5 3 Precautions on child restraints 1 32 1 40 1 45 1 50 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 21 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSTEM Se a a a 1 53 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Pre tensioner seat belt system 1 66 Programmable features a naaa 4 9 4 26 P sh starting a se d eo aoo k a a a 6 10 R Radio Car phone or CBradio 4 92 Compact Disc CD changer 4 50 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD CHANGE sinew as coe oe he ee a 4 47 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player ea soe we a oe oe ea ee wee 4 55 Rear audio controls 4 75 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 73 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test ke ew a ee ee a ww 9 3
234. e and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR and Towing capacity All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops highway weigh stations building supply centers or salvage yards To determine the available payload capacity for tongue king pin load use the following proce dure 1 Locate the GVWR on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 2 Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer 3 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum tongue king pin load To determine the available towing capacity use the following procedure 1 Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this section 2 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum towing capacity To determine the Gross Trailer Weight weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo that are normally in the trailer when it is towed Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum to
235. e cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide AWARNING e Do not breathe exhaust gases they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is danger ous It can cause unconsciousness or death 5 2 Starting and driving If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all win dows fully open and have the vehicle inspected immediately Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time Keep the lift gate and rear vent windows closed while driving otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passen ger compartment If you must drive with the lift gate or rear vent windows open follow these precautions 1 Open all the windows 2 Set the air recirculation but ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air If electrical wiring or other cable con nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the lift gate or the body follow the manufacturer s recommen dation to prevent carbon monoxide en try into the vehicle The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever a The vehicle is raised for service b You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment c You notice a change in
236. e fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment Maintenance and do it yourself 8 23 5 If the fuse is open replace it with a new fuse 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace with only genuine NISSAN parts 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the glove box to access the fuse box cover 3 Pull the fuse box cover to remove 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller WDI0452 Type A If the fuse is open replace it with an equivalent good fuse Push the fuse box cover to install 7 lf anew fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Type B LDIO456 BATTERY REPLACEMENT A CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed
237. e ignition switch is pushed and the Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the system If this warning illuminates you can not start the engine Check for the following causes and perform the assigned remedies The battery of the Intelligent Key carried with you is discharged completely Re place the battery with a new one The Intelligent Key carried with you is not registered to the system Use the regis tered Intelligent Key You do not have an Intelligent Key with you Carry an Intelligent Key with you 2 When the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position A chime will also sound Parking brake warning This warning illuminates when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven SHIFT P warning NISSAN Intelligent Key model This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift selector is in any position other than Park posi tion Also a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the OFF position If this warning illuminates move the shift selector to the P Park position or start the engine If the shift selector is moved to the P Park position the lock warning will appear Refer to Lock warning in this section For additional information about Intelligent Key see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Cr
238. e man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur 4 50 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock Artist and song information If the station broadcasts RDS information the RDS icon is displayed Compact disc CD changer operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the button then press one of the CD insert 1 6 slots Insert the com pact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided automati cally into the slot and start playing If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the compact disc button To insert a CD in the CD changer press the button for less than 1 5 seconds Se lect the loa
239. e oe oe ee ae 3 31 Voice recognition system 4 118 VONMIGCIC s oas oo oe Bay ee Be 2 8 WwW Warning AWD warning light 2 16 Air bag warning light 1 68 2 18 Anti lock brake warning light 2 14 Battery charge warning light 2 15 Brake warning light 2 14 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 15 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Low fuel warning light 2 16 2 18 2 24 Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Low washer fluid warning light 2 24 Passenger air bag and status light 1 62 Seat belt warning light 2 18 Vehicle security system 2 25 Warning labels for SRS 1 67 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 6 io Sw eee we Se he 2 13 Waning ligitS o e s s cee eke wed aoe 2 13 Washer switch Rear window wiper and washer SWINGS a ok ote wd a oe aR ee 2 29 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Weights See dimensions and weights 9 9 Wheels andtires 24 8 34 Wheel tire size 2 ee 9 9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country 2 aa oo ee a 9 10 Window washer fluid 8 13 Windows Locking passengers windows 2 51 Manual vent windows 2 53 Power rear windows 2 52 Power vent windows 2 53 Power windows 2 50 Rear powe
240. e products can cause imme diate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces Carefully read and follow the manufacturer s in structions before using the air fresheners FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior No matter what mats are used be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they be come excessively worn Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle includes two driver s side front floor mat brackets and one passenger s side front floor mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model The driver s side floor mat has two grommet holes incorporated in it and the passenger s side has one grommet hole Position each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet holes while cen tering the mat in the footwell Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them See Seat belt maintenance inthe Safety Seats seat belts and supplemen tal restraint system section of this
241. e sensor used is the occupant classification sensor pressure sensor It is in the bottom of the front passenger seat cushion and Is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight It works together with seat belt sensors described later For example if a child is in the front passenger seat the Advanced Air Bag Sys tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations Also if a child restraint of the type specified in the regula tions is on the seat its weight and the child s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF Occupant classification sensor opera tion can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors The front passenger seat belt sensors are de signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat belt such as when it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension de tected on the seat belt the advanced air bag system determines whether the front passenger air bag should be automatically turned OFF as required by the regulations Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out lined in this manual should not cause the passen ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF For small adults it may be turned OFF however if the occupant takes his her we
242. e sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery Check the fluid level in each cell It should be between the MAX and MIN lines Ve hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level Brake fluid level Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself Engine drive belts Make sure the drive belts are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports cracks or holes If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving
243. e unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Select to turn on or turn off the door lock unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch Intelligent Key Lock Reply Select to change the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when a door handle request switch is pushed to lock Select to turn off all sounds made when a door handle request switch is pushed by selecting the OFF key Intelligent Key Unlock Reply Select to change the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when a door handle request switch is pushed to unlock Select to turn off all sounds made when a door handle request switch is pushed by selecting the OFF key Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the driver s seat moving backwards for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position the driver s seat moves to the previous position Return All Settings to Default Select to change all the comfort and convenience systems to their default settings 4 30 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Others 8 00 Sack ae i Voice Recognition aH Language Units Adjust voice recognition settings Others settings Select the Others key by using the NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but
244. ean Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition Also check tires for proper inflation Check that all doors are closed Position seat and adjust head restraint Adjust inside and outside mirrors Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position See Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual STARTING THE ENGINE 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Move the shift selector to P Park or N Neutral P Park is recommended The shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector is in any of the driving positions 3 Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START Release the key when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure f the engine is very hard to start in ex tremely cold weather or when restarting depress the accelerator pedal a little ap proximately 1 3 to the floor and hold it and then crank the engine Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded de
245. ected by the occupant classification sensor Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation such as if a child is standing on the seat or if two children are on the seat contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly Using the passenger air bag status light you can monitor when the front passenger air bag Is au tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied The light will not illuminate when the front pas senger seat is unoccupied If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen ger air bag status light is illuminated indicating that the air bag is OFF it could be that the person is a small adult or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly If a child restraint must be used in the front seat the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used If the air bag status light is not illuminated indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system used properly Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly If the air bag status light is not illuminated reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear sea
246. ed when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 4 When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat ing location the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is within 31 50 in 80 cm from each request switch 1 3 14 Pre driving checks and adjustments If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range it is possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock unlock the doors DOOR LOCKS UNLOCKS PRECAUTION Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli gent Key is outside the vehicle After locking with the door handle request switch verify the doors are securely locked by testing them To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch The door will be unlocked but will not open Release the door handle once and pull it ag
247. ed to use E 85 Fuel Etha nol Regular unleaded regular gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels combined U S government regulations require Fuel Ethanol dispensing pumps to have a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region A CAUTION Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage or a loss of vehicle performance General information This information is for Flexible Fuel vehicles FFV only FFV vehicles can be identified by the fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Unleaded Gasoline Only This section only cov ers those subjects that are unique to Flexible Fuel vehicles A CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door la bel can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel etha nol and 15 unleaded gasoline AWARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flam mable and could cause serious per sonal injury e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler cap or filling the tank e Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research oct
248. ee eee 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 10 Vehicle identification number chassis number 00ccee cece cece eee eeeee 9 10 Engine serial number wcesesieeecvenneeeee yee ge 9 11 F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 11 Emission control information label 9 11 Tire and loading information label 9 12 Air conditioner specification label 9 12 Installing front license plate 9 12 Vehicle loading information 0 0 000 9 13 WONG 2 c2gecns tare ehaceas owes te ean T T 9 13 Vehicle load capacity s lt 22 lt sdi0eeneneeteedencens 9 13 Securmng the bad serisi seceru asese uri erei 9 15 Loading MPS cress reies s tasr amei e Ea A E 9 16 Measurement of weights uuassei 9 16 TOWING a trailert s c2ceceececdvesedd ohactadtacaeece 9 17 Maximum load limits nnana anaana 9 17 Towing load specification 0 005 9 20 Towing SAIC see ece ese ccewsengtasewes kerin 9 21 Flat OWING aved veSecs oxo E E T EEE 9 28 SNOW DOW wsucacmes been es nET i banderas ERE 9 29 Uniform tire quality grading 22 0eee 9 29 Emission control system warranty 2 006 9 30 Reporting safety defects US only 04 9 31 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 9 31 Event Data Recorders EDR 00cc unnan 9 32 Owner s Manual Service Manual order information 9 33 In t
249. efore driving be sure the brake warning light goes out 5 18 Starting and driving 0 p CRUISE CONTROL t ___ACCEL RES Z ae x 4 ON OFF ACCEL RES switch COAST SET switch CANCEL switch ON OFF switch PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL lf the cruise control system malfunctions it cancels automatically The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display then blinks to warn the driver see Vehicle infor mation display in the Instruments and con trols section e f the SET indicator light blinks push the cruise control ON OFF switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control ON OFF switch is pushed ON while pushing the ACCEL RES COAST SET or CANCEL switch To prop erly set the cruise control system use the following procedures AWARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed On winding or hilly roads On slippery roads rain snow ice etc In very windy areas Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be tween 25 89 MPH 40 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal To turn on the cruise control push the
250. eft or right to set the desired temperature To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows press the fan control speed button until it reaches the maximum speed oS e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode When the defroster control button GY is activated the air conditioner will automati cally be turned on at outside temperatures above 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control is turned OFF the vehicle is shut off or the A C button is pressed even if the air flow MODE control button is used to select a position other than the GY position This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The air recirculation mode auto matically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control buttons Press the fan speed control buttons SS to manually control the fan speed Press OFF to turn the system off Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation The SS mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger com partment to prevent fogging in defrost floor or def floor modes Push the air recirculation button C amp 2 to recir culate interior air inside the vehicle Push t
251. ehicle 2 Push down to lock the console box in place 3 Replace the cup holder tray CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN To open the cargo area storage bin pull down on the tab and pull the lid off eeey To access the floor storage area push down 1 to raise the handle then pull up on the handle to lift the luggage board LUGGAGE HOOKS The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps instruments and controls 2 47 AWARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo e Never allow anyone to ride in the lug gage area It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously o injured or killed Side finisher Floor hooks Do not allow people to ride in any area When hooking on ropes do not apply a load of Do not apply a load of more than 110 Ib 490 N of your vehicle that is not equipped with more than 55 Ib 245 N to a single N hookor44 to a single hook seats and seat belts Ib 196 N to a single hook The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area Secure any items in the cargo area Your child could be seri
252. eight zero zero or eight oh oh 500 700 and 900 are also lf the command is not recognized the sys supported tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice Examples 2 A list of commands appears on the screen e Press the 4 switch on the steering 1 800 662 6200 and the PN ag esate Risa you like wheel to return to the previous screen One eight zero zero six six two six two Help Sete a i f you want to cancel the command press zero zero and hold the f switch The message One eight hundred six six two six two After the tone sounds and the icon on the Voice cancelled will be announced zero zero screen changes from Do to B Speak f you want to adjust the volume of the sys a command Continue to follow the voice menu prompts and speak after the tone sounds until your desired operation is completed tem feedback push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement 4 122 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone num bers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the system will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the system will then as
253. el is operated the dis play turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons is pressed the display will not automatically turn off until that operation is finished Otherwise the screen turns off auto matically after five seconds To turn the screen on Press the SETTING button and select the Display key and then select the Display ON key Then set the screen to on by press ing the ENTER button or Hold the 2 OFF button for approxi mately two seconds and the message re suming display will appear and the Display ON key will be automatically turned on no amber indicator Background color Select the Background Color key the display color changes between day and night The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button 8 00 E On screen Clock Clock Format 21 Offset Adjust a i oC omn JO l Daylight Saving Time Time Zone i Display clock in top right corner of display Clock The following display will appear after pressing the SETTING button then selecting the Clock key using the NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER button On screen Clock When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is a
254. el lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off A CAUTION Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment Al ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component har nesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position Your vehicle is equipped with an auto matic engine cooling fan It may come on at any time without warning even if the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the engine is not running To avoid injury always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan This Maintenance and do it yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions and could affect warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing have it done by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS RSEN 8 6 Maintena
255. eminder 4 6 4 22 Top tether strap child restraint 1 37 Tow mode switch aaao a a aa 2 38 Towing 2 wheel drive models 6 12 4 wheel drive models 6 13 Flat towing ici a ht mle dy we pee BO ee 9 28 TOW TUCK TOWING sccis xe ae Mie we ek 6 11 Towing load specification 9 20 Trailer OWING s o saco de oo ee oe wd 9 17 Transceiver HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 58 Transmission Driving with automatic transmission 5 14 Travel See registering your vehicle in another COUN o 2 34 25 6a49 4 bea ek aie ed 9 10 Trip odometer aaao oe SO ew 2 5 Turn signal switch aaao aaa aaa 2 33 U Uniform tire quality grading 9 29 V Vany MIMO s a eea ae Se ee e 3 31 Variable voltage control system 8 15 Vehicle dimensions and weights 9 9 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 36 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system 5 30 Vehicle electronic system 4 13 4 29 Vehicle identification oaoa aa aaa 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN Chassis number a oa aaa 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 10 Vehicle loading information 9 13 Vehicle recovery 6 02 000 6 13 6 14 Vehicle security system 2 25 Vehicle security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 27 3 4 5 12 Ventilators oe ae cage ea eee eee 4 35 VOT gana a ob e
256. ence that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations 4 94 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Visteon USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System amp Bluetooth If the vehicle is in motion some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds Ifthe i button is pressed before the initialization completes the system will announce Hands free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds Speak in a natural voice without
257. epeated short distance driving at cold out side temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger ant HFC 134a R 134a and the oil NISSAN A C system oil Type S or the exact equiva lents A CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condition ing system and will require the replace ment of all air conditioner system components The refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth s ozone layer Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth s atmosphere certain government regula tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys tem service A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger ant Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system Technical and consumer information 9 7 SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE VK56DE Type Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC Cylinder arrangement 8 cylinder V block Slanted at 90 Bore x Stroke in mm 3 858 x 3 622 98 x 92 Displacement cu in cm 338 78 5 552 Firing order 1 8 7 3
258. equency can bend around objects and skip along the ground In addition the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth Because of these characteristics AM signals are also sub ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver Fading Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist Static Caused by thunderstorms electrical power lines electric signs and even traffic lights 4 40 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION if so equipped When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced the satellite radio may not work properly This is not a mal function Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal If possible do not put cargo over the satellite antenna A build up of ice on the satellite
259. er 02 002 00e 4 38 Daa e ETE 5 ateee encase E 4 39 Servicing air conditioner s s s eee 4 39 Audio SYSICM ctccccycuvecrecteenasGeteeseroten a 4 39 ROCIO strat seoee sannan esaee EE A R 4 39 FM radio reception we ccen dug eeckaetentedcendeans 4 40 AM radio reception wa2 lt 254Gsiueenenveseebit cane 4 40 Satellite radio reception if so equipped 4 40 Audio operation precautions 00ee eee 4 41 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD changer if so equipped cece eee 4 47 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player if so equipped unnn cece eee eee 4 55 CompactFlash CF player operation if so equipped ac ccewes sdosdes deen ceseenad eas 4 60 Music Box Hard Drive audio system if so equipped aseercnceuscaneenceuesaesevean 4 62 CD CF CompactFlash care and cleaning 4 71 Steering wheel switch for audio control 4 73 Rear audio CONMOLS s6ienc cniiweentwanesaeetacse 4 75 WOUCING 4d each E E AT E T E T 4 76 NISSAN mobile entertainment system MES fso COUIDDEG co viemsac eee rarece wadwecsugerce Goes 4 76 Digital video disc DVD player controls 4 78 Remote COMMOl caswededie ketene een e eae ween de 4 79 Flip down SCIECN s lt 2 0 lt 2seedus outeeecekewcent ened 4 79 Before operating the DVD mobile entertainment system 22 02ee eres 4 80 Playing a digital versatile disc DVD 4 82 Remote control operation
260. er Anticipate stops and brake gradually NISSAN recommends that the cruise con trol not be used while towing a trailer Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers Obey the local speed limits 9 28 Technical and consumer information Check your hitch trailer wiring harness con nections and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles 80 km of travel and at every break When launching a boat don t allow the wa ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quently For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual Tow mode Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load Press the TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi nates when tow mode is selected Press the TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off Tow mode is automatically cancelled when the ignition switch is turned OFF Tow mode includes the following features Grade logic Adjusts transmission shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a grade Downhill Speed Control DSC automati
261. er 4WD shift switch between 4H and 4LO unless you have first stopped the vehicle and moved the shift selector to N Neutral Make sure the transfer 4LO posi tion indicator illuminates when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO The indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other 4WD shift indicator Z3zy model While the engine is running the 4WD shift indi cator will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch The 4WD shift indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other Automatic transmission position indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this indicator shows the selector posi tion See Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual SECURITY SYSTEMS Your vehicle has two types of security systems Vehicle security system NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors when the system is armed It is not however a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations Al ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a Instruments and controls 2 25 brief period Never leave your keys in the
262. er driving 5 33 Compact disc CD player 4 58 CompactFlash CF player 4 60 Console box 00 2 40 2 46 Control panel buttons 4 17 Brightness contrast button 4 16 4 32 Enter button a 4 a d kate wok dee ae 4 2 4 17 Setting button 4 9 4 26 Startup screen 2 000048 4 20 Without navigation system 4 2 Controls Audio controls steering wheel 4 73 Heater and air conditioner controls 4 36 Rear audio controls 4 75 Rear seat air conditioner 4 38 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 208 9 2 10 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Checking engine coolant level 8 7 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Corrosion protection osoo 7 5 Cruise control a aooaa a 5 18 Cup holders naaa aaa 2 44 Curtain side impact and rollover air bag D Daytime running light system Canada Onl s ic oe ooo ok eee ee es 2 32 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIC o s o ce od tee eo kee eo eee 2 30 Digital video disc DVD 4 76 Dimensions and weights 9 9 Dimmer switch for instrument panel 2 33 Display controls see control panel buttons 4 2 4 17 Distance toempty 05845 4 5 4 21 Door locks ant u ta tebe Reb ee 3 5 Drive DEE lt a fede e g oe ak et Oe Ge a 8 16 Drive positioner Aut
263. er operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed C Intermittent INT intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward A Slower or Faster Also the inter mittent operation speed varies in accor dance with the vehicle speed For example when the vehicle speed is high the intermit tent operation speed will be faster NOTE You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func tion Refer to Comfort amp convenience set tings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems sec tion later in this manual 2 Low LO continuous low speed operation 3 High HI continuous high speed opera tion Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep opera tion MIST of the wiper Pull the lever toward you 8 to operate the washer The wiper will also operate several times AWARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield A CAUTION Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds Do not operate the washer if the reser voir tank is empty Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid co
264. eriodically in spected for wear cracking bulg ing or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire s should be replaced The original tires have built in tread wear indicators When the wear indicators are visible the tire s should be replaced Tires degrade with age and use Have tires including the spare over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob vious Replace the tires as neces sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in jury If it is necessary to repair the spare tire contact a NISSAN dealer For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire use the same size tread design speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING The use of tires other than those recom mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construction bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling VDC system ground clear ance body to tire clea
265. erms that are defined throughout this section Intended Outboard Sidewall is 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 the out ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle 8 40 Maintenance and do it yourself TYPES OF TIRES AWARNING When changing or replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type i e Summer All Season or Snow and construction A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and availability Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pres sure warning system For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod els to provide good performance all year includ ing snowy and icy road conditions All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON
266. ers in a sudden stop or collision The child restraint must be used and installed properly Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Infants and children should never be held on anyone s lap In a collision or sudden braking the child could be crushed between the adult and the vehicle Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front seat see Child restraint installation using the seat belts later in this section Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An inflating air bag could seri ously injure or kill a child A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used
267. ery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery To maintain maxi mum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For details see Battery in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before operating the vehicle Starting and driving 5 33 For details see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual TIRE EQUIPMENT 1 SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave ment However the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions If you operate your ve hicle on snowy or icy roads NISSAN recom mends the use of MUD amp SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type size speed rating and availability informa tion For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires 3 Tire chains may be used For details see T
268. esponsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device Starting and driving 5 5 AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER AWARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident Be alert and drive defensively at all times Obey all traffic regulations Avoid excessive speed high speed cornering or sudden steering ma neuvers because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle As with any vehicle loss of control could result ina collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways Be attentive at all times and avoid driving when tired Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs including pre scription or over the counter drugs which may cause drowsiness Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual and also instruct your passengers to do so Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
269. estraint system 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint is removed store it ina secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed See Head re straint adjustment in this section for head re straint adjustment removal and installation infor mation If the seating position does not have an adjust able head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating posi tion or a different child restraint 1 45 WRS0680 Forward facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing LRSO667 Forward facing step 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted 1 46 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO668 Forward facing step 5 5 Allow the sea
270. ety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 47 WRS0475 LRS0340 LRS0361 Forward facing step 10 2nd row captain s chairs if so equipped 2nd row bench seat if so equipped 10 If the child restraint is installed in the front INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP passenger seat place the ignition switch in 2nd row captain s chairs or 2nd row the ON position The front passenger air bag status light amp should illuminate If this bench seat if so equipped light is not illuminated see Front passenger First secure the child restraint with the LATCH air bag and status light in this section lower anchors 2nd row captain s or bench out Move the child restraint to another board seating positions only or the seat belt as seating position Have the system applicable checked by a NISSAN dealer After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted the ALR mode child re straint mode is canceled 1 48 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 If necessary raise or remove the head re straint to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed See Head restraint adjustment in this section for head restraint adjustment removal and installation information Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
271. ey have ac cess to the vehicle or the EDR EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per mitted by law OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle Filled with wiring diagrams illustrations and step by step diagnostic and adjustment pro cedures this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships Also available are genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact 1 800 450 9491 www nissan techinfo com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals for this model year and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser vice Manual or Owner s Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer For the phone num ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1 800 387 0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa tive will assist you Also available
272. f road driving DIOCAULONS sasaa k aiii E eerie tenn hae ode eae 5 3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Avoiding collision and rollover 0005 5 6 Offroad recOve secreet tE unak seater aos ates 5 6 Rapid air pressure lOSS 3sec0dietew ented enews as 5 6 Drinking alcohol drugs and driving 5 7 Driving safety precautions 00e eee 5 7 IMO SWIG acces cares nueceaenecrace vue E a 5 9 NISSAN Intelligent Key if so equipped 5 9 Ignition switch POSILIONS 22 2 2 lt 0e exe eyeead eens 5 10 Automatic transmission 222 045 eahenweeeeeeeen a 5 11 Key DOSWIONS oveseoseasearsenerteiueenseesedne 5 11 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system 5 12 Before starting the engine 2 0000 5 12 Staing Wie engine ess ccaneeees ea saeeenneeword ens 5 12 Driving the vehicle sii 0 22 h14deeneceeteceeeeeeses 5 13 Engine protection MOG sc 2 sc2eedeerele seeeet 5 13 Automatic transmission 02 0200eeeeee 5 14 PakO DaKa Gaon cent ecsedeececeeueee ae eeeraeeacs 5 17 CUS CONTO ocd ed vee eeyernh eu Hea TENAS 5 18 Precautions on cruise control 5 18 Cruise control operations 2 00eeeee 5 19 Breakin schedule cue cescne ae beeupewenateneraeeans 5 20 Increasing fuel economy 2 02e0e eee ee 5 20 EJ Using four wheel drive 4WD 5 21 Transfer case shifting procedures 5 21 Parking parking on WINS 22 2
273. f the scene can be seen from a different angle Touch the ON key to enable the angle mark the indicator light will illuminate 10Key Search Touch the 10Key Search key to open the num ber entry screen Input the number you want to search for and touch the OK key The specified Title Chapter or Group Track will be played Title Search The scene with the specified title will be dis played the number of times the key or the key is touched Menu Skip DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the Menu Skip key is turned on Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on DVD Language Touch the DVD Language key to open the num ber entry screen Input the number correspond ing to the preferred language and touch the OK key The DVD top menu language will be changed to the one specified DRC DRC Dynamic Range Compression allows you to tune the dynamic range of the sound recorded in the Dolby Digital format Touch the key or the key to tune the DRC DVD auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are located on the front of the DVD player which is located inside the cen ter console NTSC and PAL compatible devices such as video games camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifi
274. fect your radio reception Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the de vice in a different location may reduce or elimi nate the noise FM RADIO RECEPTION Range FM range Is normally limited to 25 30 mi 40 48 km with monaural single channel FM having slightly more range than stereo FM Exter nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi 40 km The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver FM signals follow a line of sight path exhibiting many of the same char acteristics as light For example they will reflect off objects Fade and drift As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter the signals will tend to fade and or drift Static and flutter During signal interference from buildings large hills or due to antenna position usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter static or flutter can be heard This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response Multipath reception Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time The signals may cancel each other resulting in mo mentary flutter or loss of sound AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals because of their low fr
275. feel a lack of engine power detect abnormal noise etc take the following steps 1 Move the vehicle safely off the road apply the parking brake and move the shift selector to P Park Do not stop the engine 2 Turn off the air conditioner Open all the windows move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed 3 Get out of the vehicle Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood If steam or cool ant is escaping turn off the engine Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen 4 Open the engine hood AWARNING If steam or water is coming from the en gine stand clear to prevent getting burned 5 Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness Also check if the cooling fan is running The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water If coolant is leaking the water pump belt is missing or loose or the cooling fan does not run stop the en gine AWARNING Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or get caught in engine belts or the engine cooling fan The engine cooling fan can start at any time 6 After the engine cools down check the cool ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer TOW
276. flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once 4 Push the door handle request switch again within 30 seconds to unlock all doors For power liftgate opening 1 Carry the intelligent key 2 Pull the power liftgate handle or press the power liftgate button 3 Power back door open If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors that door may not be unlocked Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door If the door does not unlock after return ing the door handle push the door handle re quest switch to unlock the door All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch Opening any door Pushing the ignition switch The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow ing operations Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the remote controller Switching the room light switch to the OFF position HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft 10 m away from the vehicle The operating distance
277. for 25 seconds or any button is pressed on the keyfob LPD0262 Silencing the horn beep feature If desired the horn beep feature can be deacti vated using the keyfob NOTE If you change the horn beep and light flash feature with the keyfob the display screen if so equipped will not show the current mode and cannot be used to change the mode Use the keyfob to return to the pre vious mode and re enable the display screen control To deactivate Press and hold the and 2 buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and if buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered Using the interior lights Press the ff button on the keyfob once to turn on the interior lights and puddle lamps if so equipped For additional information refer to Interior light in the Instruments and controls section earlier in this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY if so equipped AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac
278. for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual 1 66 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seat belts with pretensioners Front seats AWARNING The pretensioners cannot be reused af ter activation They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but a pretensioner is not activated be sure to have the pre tensioner system checked and if nec essary replaced by your NISSAN dealer No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system This is to pre vent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system e If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury The pretensioner system activates in conjunction with the front air bag system The pretensioner system also ac
279. for example press the SETTING button gt then select the Comfort amp Conv key 2 Menu Selections Shows the options to choose within that 4 20 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems menu screen for example Auto Interior Illu mination etc 3 UP DOWN Movement Indicator Shows that the NISSAN controller may be used to move UP DOWN on the screen and select more options 4 Screen Count Shows the number of menu selections avail able for that screen for example 1 14 5 Footer Information Line Provides more information if available about the menu selection currently high lighted for example Cabin lighting when unlocking doors HOW TO USE THE STATUS BUTTON To display the status of the audio climate control system fuel consumption and navigation system press the STATUS button The following information will appear when the STATUS button is pressed Audio Audio and climate control system Audio climate control temperature settings av erage fuel economy and distance to empty Audio climate control temperature settings and Navigation System Audio G Fuel economy HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Press the INFO button the display screen shows vehicle and navigation information for your con venience The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle See the following for details Information gt Fuel
280. for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to operate 5 28 Starting and driving BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will still have braking at 2 wheels BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal However greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis tance will be longer Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving This will overheat the brakes wear out the brake pads faster and reduce gas mileage To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control AWARNING While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerating or downshifting Abrupt braking or accel erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the brakes will not work Braking will be harder Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull t
281. formation concerning the following systems Driver and passenger supplemental front impact air bag NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag Roof mounted curtain side impact and roll over supplemental air bag Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front impact air bag system The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bags This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact colli sions The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im pacted Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions In a side impact the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted In a rollover both curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate and re main inflated for a short time These supplemental restraint systems are de signed to supplement the crash protection pro vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute for them Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant
282. g of the seat belt system This may affect the front air bag system Tampering with the seat belt system may result in seri ous personal injury 1 64 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The Supplemental Restraint System SRS wiring should not be modified or disconnected Unautho rized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system e A cracked windshield should be re placed immediately by a qualified re pair facility A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag and roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats The curtain and roll over air bags are located in the side roof rails in all 3 rows These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out of position occupants However all of the information cautio
283. g or fast forwarding When buttons the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the CD button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play ing the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play TUNE FLDR Folder knob While playing an MP3 WMA CD turn the TUNE FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or backward through available folders SCAN RPT random and repeat button When the SCAN RPT button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows CD 1 DISC RPT 1 TRK RPT 1 DISC RDM 1 DISC RPT MP3 WMA CD 1 DISC RPT 1 FOLDER RPT 1 TRK RPT 1 DISC RDM 1 FOLDER RDM 1 DISC RPT 1 DISC RPT the entire disc will be repeated 1 TRK RPT the current track playing will be repeated 1 DISC RDM all tracks will be played randomly 1 FOLDER RPT the folder currently being ac cessed will be repeated 1 FOLDER RDM the tracks in the current folder being accessed will be played randomly REAR CTRL Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear seat audio controller on Rear Controls UN LOCKED will display Pressing the REAR CTRL button again will turn the rear seat audio control ler off Rear Contr
284. gage area are powered directly by the vehicle s battery The power outlets located on the passenger s side of the instrument panel and in the 2nd row are powered only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Open the cap to use a power outlet LICO550 2nd row A CAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter See your NISSAN dealer for additional information Do not use with accessories that ex ceed a 12 volt 120W 10A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory LIC0551 Luggage area Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water to contact the outlet Instruments and controls 2 39 STORAGE OF EOY LIC1183 Center stack storage INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE TRAYS AWARNING Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accide
285. gerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle 6 In case of emergency PIQUA E E cae seeece gees ase ass 6 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 6 2 Changing a flat Tire crsissrsesi erines toned sd si 6 2 Jump Saing sececeececeteetennes PENE EEn EE 6 8 enaere laie E ete E Sant 6 10 If your vehicle overheatsS 05 Towing your vehicle 00e eee eee Towing recommended by NISSAN Vehicle recovery freeing a stuck vehicle FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pres sure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the system also displays pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the TPMS will acti vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h For more details refer to Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section Tire pressure information in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems
286. gnition accuracy By repeating a number of commands the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system The 4 104 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for memory A and memory B If memory A is available the system will use memory A to store the model If memory A is in use and memory B is available the system will use memory B to store the model If both of the memory locations are in use the system will ask the user to select which memory location should be overwritten Training procedure The procedure for training a voice Is as follows 1 Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location 2 Sit in the driver s seat with the engine run ning the parking brake on and the transmis sion in P Park 3 Press and hold the C4 than 5 seconds 4 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND f button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END ee button to select a dif ferent language 5 Press the C6 button for more button 10 11 For information on selecting a different lan guage see Choosing a language earlier in this section Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically If both memory locations are already in use the system will prompt you to overwrite one Follow the instructions
287. h For additional infor mation see Seats in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint sys tem section of this manual and Pedal posi tion adjustment and Outside mirrors ear lier in this section During this step do not place the ignition switch in any position other than ON 4 Push the SET switch and within 5 seconds push the memory switch 1 or 2 The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch After the indicator light goes off the se lected positions are stored in the selected memory 1 or 2 If a new memory is stored in the same memory switch the previous memory will be deleted Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory position memory switch 1 or 2 with the follow ing procedure 1 Follow the steps for storing a memory posi tion 2 While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec onds press the 1 button on the keyfob The indicator light will blink After the indica tor light goes off the keyfob is linked to that memory setting With the key removed from the ignition switch or the ignition switch is moved to OFF press the button onthe keyfob The driver s seat accelerator and brake pedals and outside mir rors will move to the memorized position NOTE If a new memory position is save
288. he Interval Reminder ON key is set to Adjust tone and advanced audio settings Adjust tone and advanced audio settings OFF indicator light not illuminated The maintenance interval is set again LHA0927 WHA0937 Type A Type B HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed the SET TINGS screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and modes that are available for your vehicle Use the NISSAN controller to select each item to be set and press the ENTER button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 9 Settings gt Display Auto Day 12 00 Display Brightness Contrast Background Color Toggles display on and off Display settings Select the Display key and press the ENTER button The Display settings screen will appear Settings gt Display Auto Day 12 00 Display 123456789 M Push ENTER to adjust brightness Brightness contrast Select the Brightness key or the Contrast key to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map background Use the NISSAN controller to adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the con trast to lower or higher The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button 4 10 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Push DAY NIGHT button to resume display
289. he AUTO button to return to automatic mode Air flow control Pushing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet gt vr Air flows from center and side vents 74 Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets Air flows mainly from foot outlets Fi Air flows from defroster and foot outlets ty Air flows from defroster outlets To turn system off Press the OFF button OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds However this is not a malfunction After the coolant tempera ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 37 The sunload sensor 1 located on the top center of the instrument panel helps the system main tain a constant temperature Do not put anything on or around this sensor REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER Rear seat temperature and fan speed can be controlled from both the front seat overhead con sole controls A or the rear seat overhead con sole controls Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer control of the rear climate functions to the rear passen gers To operate the rear air conditioner the engine must be running If the rear seat fan control dial is set to 0 the air conditioner is turned off If it is se
290. he bumper line A are displayed on the monitor They are indicated as reference distances to objects The lines and colors in the display indi cate distances from the back bumper line in the illustration 1 5 ft 0 5 m red 2 3ft 1 m yellow 3 7 ft 2m green 4 10 ft 3 m green The vehicle clearance lines are wider than the actual clearance Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 33 Settings gt a Auto Settings gt Display Auto Day aack Display a Brightn ss Tint 7 Color Contrast 1 6 Toggles display on and off 2 Toggles display on and off ADJUSTING THE SCREEN To adjust the quality of the screen press the SETTING button To adjust the Display ON OFF Brightness Tint Color Contrast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor press the SETTING but ton with the RearView Monitor on then touch one of the adjustment keys Press the or key on the item and adjust the level Do not adjust the Brightness Contrast Tint and Color of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving OPERATING TIPS When the shift selector is shifted to R Re verse the monitor screen automatically changes to the RearView Monitor mode However the radio can be heard It may take some time until the RearView Monitor is displayed after the shift selector has been shifted to R Reverse Objects may be distorted momentarily until the Rear View Moni
291. he LOCK position proceed as follows to remove the key 1 Move the shift selector into the P Park position 2 Turn the ignition switch slightly toward the ON position 3 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion 4 Remove the key The shift selector is designed so it cannot moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch The shift selector can be moved if the igni tion switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ACC positions The OFF position is indicated by a 1 on the key cylinder When the ignition switch is in the OFF position the steering wheel is not locked In order for the steering wheel to be locked it must be turned about 1 8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position To lock the steering wheel turn the key to the LOCK position Remove the key To unlock the steering wheel insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steer ing wheel slightly right and left If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi tion turn the steering wheel to the left or right while turning the key to unlock the key cylinder KEY POSITIONS LOCK Normal parking position 0 OFF Not used 1 ACC Accessories 2 This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running
292. he R Reverse position the monitor display shows the view directly to the rear of the vehicle AWARNING The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground The RearView Monitor is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly Objects viewed in the RearView Moni tor differ from actual distance because a wide angle lens is used Make sure that the lift gate is securely closed when backing up e Do not put anything on the rearview camera The rearview camera is in stalled beside the lift gate handle When washing the vehicle with high pressure water be sure not to spray it around the camera Otherwise water may enter the camera unit causing wa ter condensation on the lens a mal function fire or an electric shock e Do not strike the camera It is a preci sion instrument Otherwise it may mal function or cause damage resulting ina fire or an electric shock A CAUTION There is a plastic cover over the camera Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow from the cover HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and distances to objects with reference to t
293. he event of a collision 9 33 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities The actual refill capacities may be slightly different When refilling follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Fuel Engine oil 8 Drain and Refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change Cooling system With reservoir Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid PSF Brake fluid Multi purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system oil Transfer fluid Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil Windshield washer fluid shared between front and rear wipers Capacity Approximate US measure Imp measure Liter 28 gal 23 1 4 gal 105 8 6 7 8 qt 5 3 4 qt 6 5 6 1 2 at 5 1 2 qt 6 2 3 3 4 gal 3 1 8 gal 14 4 Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in the Maintenance and do it yourself section 3 1 8 qt 2 5 8 qt 3 0 3 3 8 pt 2 7 8 pt 1 6 3 3 4 pt 3 1 8 pt 1 75 1 1 4 gal 1 gal 4 5 1 For further details see Fuel recommendation 2 For further details see Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 3 If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in dri
294. he fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water Instruments and controls 2 29 REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH 0 Gy LIC1173 To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors Start the engine and push the rear window de froster switch The rear window defroster indica tor light on the display screen comes on Push the switch again to turn the defroster off The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes A CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window be careful not to scratch or dam age the rear window defroster 2 30 Instruments and controls HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH WIC1250 WIC1186 Type A Type B HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH A CAUTION Lighting Use the headlights with the engine run _ ning to avoid discharging the vehicle C When turning the switch to the DAE posi battery tion the front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights come on 2 When turning the switch to the 2 posi tion the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on Autolight system The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically The autolight system can Turn on the headlights front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights au tomatically when it is dark Turn off
295. he lift gate will be pulled to the closed and latched position by a motor The power lift gate cannot be opened using the switches at any time in the safe mode The auto reverse function remains active while the lift gate is closing in the safe mode Do not operate the lift gate again until it is checked by your NISSAN dealer 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments A CAUTION If the power lift gate does not stay open or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at any time while a continuous warning chime sounds do not operate the lift gate There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the lift gate gas stays Have the lift gate inspected by a NISSAN dealer e Do not activate the power lift gate if one or both of the lift gate gas stays are removed Damage to the lift gate or power lift gate mechanisms may occur CANCEL cC CANCEL SWITCH Push the switch toward the CANCEL position to disable the rear pillar switch The lift gate can still be opened and closed using the switch on the instrument panel and keyfob The lift gate can also be opened manually with the outside handle if the lift gate is unlocked LIFT GATE RELEASE AWARNING Always be sure the lift gate has been closed securely to prevent it from open ing while driving Do not drive with the lift gate open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex haust gas in the Starting and driving sectio
296. he radio presets Remote control and headphones If the battery is removed for any reason battery replacement other than replacement close the lid se curely peplece Mi a If you will not be using the remote control for 1 Open the lid long periods of time remove the batteries 2 Replace batteries with new ones Replacement of the batteries is needed when the remote control only functions at Size AA t trol i ize AA remote control extremely close distances to the DVD player Size AAA headphones or not at all Make sure thatthe and endson Be careful not to touch the battery terminal the batteries match the markings inside the An improperly disposed battery can harm compartment the environment Always confirm local regu 3 Close the lid securely lations for battery disposal When changing batteries do not let dust or oil get on the remote control and head phones FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This de vice may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognit
297. he tracks on the CF card will be played randomly 1 FOLDER RDM the tracks in the current folder being accessed will be played randomly CF eject Press the knob next to the CF slot while a CF card is inserted to eject the CF card Troubleshooting messages The following messages will be displayed under certain conditions Reading CompactFlash The system is reading the CF card inserted in the slot 4 62 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems No CompactFlash card A CF card is not inserted in the slot CompactFlash read error The system cannot read the CF card Unplayable file The system cannot play a music file No audio file The CF card inserted in the slot or its folder does not contain any music files Compatibility with other media If a commercially available CompactFlash adapter is inserted into the slot other memory media can also be used MUSIC BOX HARD DRIVE AUDIO SYSTEM if so equipped The Music Box Hard Drive audio system can store songs from CDs being played The system has a 9 3 gigabyte GB storage capacity and can record up to 200 hours approximately 2 900 songs The following CDs can be recorded in the Music Box Hard Drive audio system CDs without MP3 WMA files Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio Hybrid CD DA specification in Super Audio CDs Compact Disc Digital Audio CD DA speci fication in CD Extras e First session of m
298. hile the window is opening To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation pull the switch up to the second detent and release it it need not be held To stop the window press the switch down while the window is closing Auto reverse function The auto reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc curs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the window If the vehicle s battery is disconnected replaced or jump started the power window auto reverse function may not operate properly If this occurs please contact the dealer to re initialize the power window auto reverse system If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is Closing the window will be immediately low ered POWER VENT WINDOWS if so equipped Use the vent window switch located on the driv er s side of the instrument panel to open and close the power vent windows The windows cannot be operated separately To open the power vent windows press and hold the switch To close the windows pull up and hold the switch The
299. hin 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub ber If a tire dressing is applied to the tires it may react with the coating and form a compound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint If you choose to use a tire dressing take the following precautions e Use a water based tire dressing The coat ing on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil based tire dressing Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread grooves where it would be difficult to remove Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel Make sure the tire dressing is com pletely removed from the tire tread grooves Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom mended by the tire dressing manufacturer Appearance and care 7 3 CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth damp ened in mild soap solution then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before usi
300. hly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep coolant out of the reach of chil dren and pets 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations ENGINE OIL las iy Sm Se CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL l Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature Turn off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Re insert it all the way 5 Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level It should be between the H High and L Low marks This is the normal oper ating oil level range If the oil level is below the L Low mark remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening Do not overfill 6 Recheck oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of operating conditions A CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly Op erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by warranty CHANGING ENGINE OIL al Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature then turn it
301. hnical and consumer information detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle for which NISSAN is not responsible Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock after run and or overheating which may cause excessive fuel Consumption or engine damage If any of the above symptoms are en countered have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer However now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills This is not a cause for concern because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load A CAUTION Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty e E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline e U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE FFV FUEL RECOMMENDATION if so equipped Your vehicle is design
302. ht MIL in the Instruments and Controls section earlier in this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 29 STEERING WHEEL TILT OPERATION AWARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired posi tion Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel in place 3 30 Pre driving checks and adjustments PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad justed for driving comfort Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the brake and accelerator pedal position away from the driver or toward the driver The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad justed separately A WARNING Do not adjust the pedal position while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident A CAUTION Do not adjust the pedal position with your foot on the pedal SUN VISORS To block glare from the front swing down the main sun visor 2 To block glare from the side remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side 3 To block glare from the side and front swing down the sub sun visor 4 Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed A CAUTION Do not store the sun visor before return ing the extension to its original position Do not pul
303. ht flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Under these conditions the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer 1 68 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags side air bags curtain and rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one time only basis As a reminder unless it is damaged the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer When maintenance work is required on the ve hicle the front air bags side air bags curtain and rollover air bags pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance The ignition switch should al ways be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle AWARNING Once a front air bag si
304. ice PIN and connection status Pair Phone See Pairing Procedure in this section 4 116 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems a Pair Phone zi Remove Paired Phone zi Paired Phone List Edit Phone Name i Add a new Bluetooth phone max 5 gt Settings gt Bluetooth Setup 8 eT Priority Change X nmn TE T Y MT Priority Change If multiple phones are registered to the sys tem you can change the priority of the phones on the shown list The system shows the priority level of each phone Select phone to change priority Then select an other phone to swap priority levels Remove Paired Phone Delete a registered cellular phone from the paired list e Paired Phone List Up to 5 registered cellular phones are shown on the list If you select a cellular phone that is different from the one currently being connected the newly selected phone will be connected to the system e Edit Phone Name If you would like to change the way your phone s name is displayed select this key a character input screen will be displayed Settings gt Volume and Beeps i R Guidance voice ON E Ringer vol cMMMLe l i incoming cau SOMMS E Z Outgoing Call Olle Pee on I Po 6 6 DOWN Y 6 DOWN Po 6 6 DOWN Y 4 Beep when a button is pushed CALL VOLUME Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve clarity if reception between callers is unclear
305. id daa ee 4 Bw th ew 2 8 12 Capacities and recommended tdel lubricants a s saca s ae ee ee ww 9 2 ENGING COOLANT e amp x ui g aeea a 8 7 ENGING Oll so s saae BO ww a 8 8 Power steering fluid 8 11 Window washer fluid 8 13 F M V S S certification label 9 11 Fog light switch 62 ork a ee oe ow 2 33 Front air bag system See supplemental restraint system 000 000 1 61 Front seats oot ne ho eae eh ee 12 Front sonar system a2 a oa a we oe 5 32 Fuel Capacities and recommended tdel lubricantsS lt 4 4 4 4 a0 404 a 9 2 Fuel economy aoao 0 ee ee eee 5 20 Fuel gauge cee hee eee a 2 7 Fuel octane rating saaa oaa aa 9 4 Fuel recommendation 9 3 Fuel filler door and cap 3 28 PUCES GoSeecesepeecaene ag oee ax 8 22 Fusible MKS 6 a eos o aaa Se ee ee a 8 24 G Garage door opener HomeLink Universal Transceiver aaou ee 2 58 Gas Cape saari doa oa eee a A 3 28 Gauge Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge se ce es wee oe ok Oe eS a 2 9 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Engine oil pressure gauge 2 8 Fuel gauge 2 00000 2 7 Odometer oaoa 2 5 Speedometer oaoa 2 5 Tachometer aoa oaoa a ee eee 2 6 Trip odometer vs bes Be aaa 2 5 Voltmeter 2 a s sata bod G8 ee oo ae gs 2 8 General maintenance 8 2 Glass hatch cicaccahbewneeevue ad 3 28 GIOVE DOK 64 4 0 0 6 oe 4d od Sh
306. ide If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for the first time or you do not know how to operate it you can display the User Guide for confirmation You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide which con tains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands Finding a Street Address Information gt User Guide Information gt User Guide Tutorial for entering a destination by street i i address IA Getting started IA Finding a Street Address A Using the Address Book L ae anne Placing Calls Placing Cails Tutorial for making a phone call by voice Help on speakin i p on sp g command operation l Finding a Street Address ERER ed a a EEEE E PETET naamani y t t Hi iow i i a LEET EO L AN Bi A E ERER ERA RERA Placing Calls Voice Recognition Settings Help on Speaking Help on speaking Adapting the System to Your Voice g Displays useful tips of speaking for correct Push the ENTER switch to select Push the ENTER switch to select command recognition by the system Voice Recognition Settings Itty Kg Describes the available Voice Recognition settings 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument NOTE panel You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressing 2 Highlight the Others key using the the 4 switch and saying Help NISSAN troll d the ENTER Nor ne eae 7 4 Highlight the
307. iers are now producing reformu lated gasolines These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy genates such as ethanol MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de termined If in doubt ask your service station manager If you use oxygenate blend gasoline please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and or fuel system damage The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline e If an oxygenate blend other than methanol blend is used it should con tain no more than 10 oxygenate MTBE may however be added up to 15 If a methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 5 methanol methyl alcohol wood alcohol It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro sion inhibitors If not properly formu lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and or vehicle performance problems At this time sufficient data is not avail able to ensu
308. ight off the seat cush ion for example by not sitting upright by sitting on an edge of the seat or by otherwise being out of position this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF In addition if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode child restraint mode this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag NISSAN recommends that pre teens and chil dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat If this is not possible the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode child restraint mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop This can also result in the passen ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF See Child restraints earlier in this section for proper use and installation If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash However heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation because of the object s weight det
309. ights P 2 34 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ol 32 Climate controls P 4 36 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own Power outlet P 2 38 er s Manual if so equipped Heated seat switch if so equipped See the page number indicated in paren P 2 35 theses for operating details Vehicle dynamic control VDC OFF switch P 2 36 Tow mode switch P 2 38 Shift selector P 5 13 Heated steering wheel if so equipped P 2 35 Center stack storage P 2 40 Power outlet P 2 38 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 62 Auxiliary jack P 4 53 AWD shift switch if so equipped P 5 21 Tilt steering wheel control P 3 30 Rear or front and rear sonar system off switch if so equipped P 2 37 Pedal position adjustment switch P 3 30 Power vent window if so equipped P 2 58 Lift gate open close switch if so equipped P 3 23 Instruments and controls 2 3 METERS AND GAUGES 1 Warning indicator lights 7 Automatic transmission fluid tempera 2 Tachometer ture gauge 3 Engine coolant temperature gauge 8 Odometer Twin trip odometer Vehicle 4 Voltmeter Information Display 5 Fuel gauge 9 Engine oil pressure gauge 6 Speedometer 2 4 Instruments and controls 1 Speedometer 2 Odometer twin trip display 3 Change button SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed
310. imate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 113 Answer Accept an incoming call to talk On Hold Put an incoming call on hold Reject Call Reject an incoming call To finish the call follow one of the procedures listed below a Touch the Reject Call key on the display b Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel c Press and hold the phone a steering wheel switches button on the fa 8 00 k gt 0 03 Cali in Progress XXXXXXX XXXXKXXXXX G Push ENTER to PHONE switch to hang up DURING A CALL There are some options available during a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen If necessary Hang up Finish the call Use Handset Transfer the call to the cellular phone Mute Mute your voice to the person 4 114 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Keypad Brings up a keypad enter digits when needed For example entering your PIN number for voice mail NOTE Pushing the TALK l4 switch on the steering wheel during a call allows num bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec ognition Cancel Mute This will appear after the Mute key is touched Mute will be cancelled To adjust the person s voice to be louder or quieter press the volume control switch located on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone This adjustment is al
311. in that position for up to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you continue to have programming difficulties please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared However to clear all programming press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button complete the following 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Press and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly release both buttons The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons IF YOUR VEHICLE IS S
312. in the ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list and pairing You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 93 Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption
313. ing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System using English Spanish or French To change the language perform the following 1 Press and hold the i than 5 seconds 2 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND f amp button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END se button to select a dif ferent language button for more 3 Press the SBE button For information on speaker adaptation see Speaker adaptation SA mode later in this section 4 The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan guage to Spanish in Spanish or French in French Use the following chart to select the language NOTE You must press the l4 button or the S2 button within 5 seconds to change the language Press papal PHONE END to select Press ne PHONE SEND to select Current language 5 If you decide not to change the language do not press either button After 5 seconds the VR session will end and the language will not be changed Pairing procedure NOTE The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancelled Main Menu Setup A Pair phone New phone Initiate from handset Name phone Assign priority Choose ringtone
314. ing light When There is a malfunc tion in the 4 wheel drive system wA 4wD Comes on ZN The transfer case oil temperature is abnormally high _ QWD Blinks rapidly a oe The difference in 4WD Blinks slowly wheel rotation is can large The 4WD warning light is located in the meter The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni tion switch is turned to ON It turns off soon after the engine is started If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the ignition switch is ON the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink If the 4WD warning light comes on the 4WD shift indicator light goes out 5 26 Starting and driving High temperature transfer case oil makes the warning light blink rapidly about twice per sec ond If the warning light blinks rapidly during operation stop the vehicle in a safe place imme diately Then if the light goes off after a while you can continue driving A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the warning light blink slowly about once per two seconds Change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive fast A CAUTION If the warning light comes on or blinks slowly during operation or rapidly after stopping the vehicle for a while have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not recommended when the 4WD warning light turns on When the wa
315. injuries However an inflating side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag may Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system cause abrasions or other injuries Side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants Because of this the force of the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against these air bag modules during inflation The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over The curtain and rollover air bag will remain in flated for a short time The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START posi tion After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational 1 65 AWARNING Do not place any objects near the seat back of the front seats Also do not place any objects an umbrella bag etc
316. install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious per sonal injury Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti vated it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor See your NISSAN dealer Removal and installation of preten sioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer All seat belt assemblies including re tractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN recom mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted All child restraints and attaching hard ware should be inspected after any col lision Always follow the restraint manufacturer s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 23 PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips not the waist Place the shoulder belt over y
317. installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels Do not use tire chains on dry roads Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear paved roads WD10258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7 500 miles 12 000 km See Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section in this manual for tire re placing procedures As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Maintenance and do it yourself 8 41 Wheel nut tightening torque 98 ft lb 133 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tight ened to specifications at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval AWARNING e After rotating the tires check and adjust the tire pressure Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet 8 42 Maintenance and do it yourself l 2 Wear indicator Location mark Tire wear and damage AWARNING Tires should be p
318. intenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day op eration They are essential for proper vehicle op eration It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed 8 2 Maintenance and do it yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools These checks or inspections can be done by you a qualified technician or if you prefer a NISSAN dealer Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN technicians are well trained specialists who are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins service tips and in dealership training programs They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve hicles before they work on your vehicle rather than after they have worked on it You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be per formed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smells be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it p
319. io phone and voice recognition systems 4 55 While in this screen you can also adjust the other 8 00 rcn audio settings by touching the corresponding ne C AN c Bass C M gt 3 Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the To _ Simm El rene E desired level touch the BACK key Balance MI eis Balance Te MINI e Clock set LOrE EE B cate WUUCUAUN Econ B For setting the clock see Clock under the Speed Sensitive Vol OCF J E Presson Paves auto C Control panel buttons color screen without navigation system heading earlier in this section i Push ENTER to adjust setting Enhaces stereo imaging and sound Precision phased audio if so equipped To turn on or off the precision phased audio press the SETTING button Then touch the Au dio key the audio settings screen will be dis played Touch the Precision Phased Audio ON key If the amber indicator light is displayed the precision phased audio is enabled Touching the Precision Phased Audio ON key again will turn off the precision phased audio the indicator light will disappear When this item is turned on super high pitch sound and super low pitch sound are empha sized and midrange sound is played naturally 4 56 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems CD MP3 display mode While listening to a CD or an MP3 WMA CD certain text might be able to be displayed when CD en
320. ion You can also restart the entry exit function using the following proce dure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position The entry exit function should now work properly 3 38 Pre driving checks and adjustments SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH 7 km h When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner is Operating When the adjusting switch for the driver s seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating When the seat has been already moved to the memorized position When no seat position is stored in the memory switch When the shift selector is moved from P Park to any other position When the driver s door remains open more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled For vehicles with naviga tion system see Comfort amp convenience set tings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual For vehicles without navigation system see your NISSAN dealer MEMO Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 39 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recogn
321. ion switch to the ACC position the driver s seat moves to the previous position Return All Settings to Default Select to change all the comfort and convenience systems to their default settings Settings gt Language Units 12 00 Select Language Select Units Select language Language Units Use the NISSAN controller to select the Lan guage Units key and press the ENTER button Select which setting you want to change using the NISSAN controller and selecting either the Select Language key or the Select Units key by pressing the ENTER button Settings gt Select Language English Frangais Espanol Select system language Select Language Select the English key the Francais key or the Espa ol key to change the language shown on the display Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 15 Settings gt Select Units 12 00 A e ean i C E ooo F i 1 Select Units Select the US mi F MPG key or the Metric km C L 100 km key to change the units shown on the display Audio settings For audio settings refer to Audio System later in this section X12 OFF BUTTON To change the display brightness press the Xt D OFF button Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display Then adjust the brightness by using the NISSAN controller The display brightness can also be a
322. ion about the automatic anti glare feature refer to Automatic anti glare rearview mirror in the Pre driving checks and adjust ments section 2 10 Instruments and controls t WIC0904 Type A COMPASS DISPLAY Pushthe or button for about 1 sec ond when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to toggle the outside temperature and compass direction display on or off The dis play will indicate the direction that the vehicle is heading N North E East S South W West LICO583 Type B If the display reads C calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH 8 km h You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route The com pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCEDURE The difference between magnetic north and geo graphical north is known as variance In some areas this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens 1 Press and hold the button for about 5 seconds The current zone number will ap pear in the display Release the button 2 Find your current location on the zone map Refer to the illustration 3 Press the button repeatedly to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears i
323. ion systems 8 00 E Delete All Zif XAXXAXXXXX nf XXXXXXXXX wid i Restore or permanently delete track e a a A You can also listen to the beginning of each track that has been deleted by performing the follow ing 1 Touch the Menu key and then the Music Box System Info key on the screen 2 Touch the Deleted Items key and then the Play Sample key Music Box Used Free Space iif Restore Track Deleted Items i Piay Sample Search Missing Titles Music Box Settings i Delete Track i Mood Categories 1 6 DOWN i Restores this track i Shows the amount of space available for recording Music Box settings To set up the Music Box Hard Drive audio system to your preferred settings touch the Menu key during playback then touch the Music Box Sys tem Info key and then the Music Box Settings key e Automatic Recording When this item is turned to ON the Music Box Hard Drive audio system automatically starts recording when a CD is inserted Recording Quality Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132 kbps The default is set to 132 kbps Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 69 Music Box gt Music Box Settings 8 00 sacr Automatic Recording G32 Kbps O CeO 211 Title Text Priority Delete ALL Music Box Data furver evniad 3 Recording Quality i Shows the amount of space available for recording
324. ion systems 4 91 CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN be sure to observe the following precautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts AWARNING e A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Some juris dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele phones while driving If you must make a call while your ve hicle is in motion the hands free cellu lar phone operational mode if so equipped is highly recommended Ex ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos sible from the electronic control modules Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in 20 cm away from the electronic con trol system harnesses Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body For details consult a NISSAN dealer e Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will bypass the variable voltage con trol system and the vehicle battery may not charge
325. ior Illumination Select to turn on or turn off the illumination of the interior lights when any door is unlocked Auto Headlights Sensitivity Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher right or lower left Auto Headlights Off Delay Select to change the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from O 30 45 60 90 120 150 and 180 second periods Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Select to turn on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati cally according to the vehicle speed Settings gt Comfort amp Conv 8 00 UP ee Return All Settings to Default 9 13 DOWN i Off will deactivate Smart Key for doors Remote Key Response Horn Select to turn on or turn off the horn beep mode used when the LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed NOTE If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob the mode will not be changed with the display Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re enable the display control Remote Key Response Lights Select to turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed 4 14 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems NOTE If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob the mode will not be changed with the display Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re enable the display control Auto Re Lock Time Se
326. ipment AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the VOL volume ON OFF power knob to turn the radio on If you listen to the radio with the engine not running the ignition switch should be placed in the ACC position Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influ ences Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences Using a cellular phone in or near the ve hicle may influence radio reception quality Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state of the art electronic circuits to enhance ra dio reception These circuits are designed to extend reception range and to enhance the qual ity of that reception However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle even when the finest equipment is used These char acteristics are completely normal in a given re ception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 39 Reception conditions will constantly change be cause of vehicle movement Buildings terrain signal distance and interference from other ve hicles can work against ideal reception De scribed below are some of the factors that can af
327. ipped 8 27 PIGMKS PE EEATT ET tence 8 28 PICAGIODIS sirascnigan aa Ea E E a aa 8 28 Fog lights if so equipped 00 cece eee 8 29 Exterior and interior lights 005 8 30 Wheels and tireS 000 ccc eee eee eee 8 34 Tire pressures i s245245205042804c42482525 52 neta 8 34 Wie Hab en ss net ace dee ei cede watcee cess 8 38 Types OF Wes ene eosteui es Gat teseeeusereessee ee 8 40 TS Gla lis 252 cots eee soces ce ati nt reee cease 8 41 Changing wheels and tires 2 022 05 8 41 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini mum maintenance requirements with long ser vice intervals to save you both time and money However some day to day and regular mainte nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN s good mechanical condition as well as its emis sions and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance as well as general maintenance Is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance You are a vital link in the mainte nance chain Scheduled maintenance For your convenience both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals General ma
328. ipped 2 36 Front and rear sonar system off switch if SO equipped 6 cee cece eee eens 2 37 TOW mod SWC n44 a4rdaine desan ested EEn i 2 38 POW er OULEL an cen A E AT ea ana mee ee aeace 2 38 ooa ee ee ee ee 2 40 Instrument panel storage trays 2 40 Console DOM cc accuceukenssecuda cee peeant ase 2 40 Glove DOX ccc cece cece eee eee nn naaes 2 41 Sunglasses holder 0 000 ccc e eee eee ees 2 41 Map POCKelsaheuceterereetennnesenaceden eeciege 2 42 Seatback POCKelen4 sing bsteee narran nnne 2 42 Overhead console cisescvetevcaiea ves views ws 2 43 CUP NOlCIS c4020 eeaetaeedeee ae enan bode be pees 2 44 2nd row center console if so equipped 2 46 Cargo area storage bDin 00c eee ee eee 2 47 Luggage NOOKSin5 502544 ohec4 duende ae ee ea exces 2 47 ROOnNAC Ke ctscenc seuss wieder canrasukees anes 2 49 WINDOWS s 2t lt 54t520de0eb2etseeesdangandedeauaad 2 50 Power WINOGW Ss cdeeaieadcscsudonanensmes ene ne 2 50 Power vent windows if so equipped 2 53 Manual vent windows if so equipped 2 53 Moonroof if So equipped 0c cece eee eens 2 54 Automatic moonroof 0c cence eee e eens 2 54 Miror NGI seas cee cere eee eeuee hee ete ees ee aoe 2 55 Gonsales ghi nace nesre eka E dae E ne 2 56 Personal ighis cas lt ascesseeeeauueeucasseceeeesers 2 57 Map GINS 4 eeens 25 oeee th namean nee beuede oeee 2 57 Cargo ON nc4 caenad canxneko
329. ire chains in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual 5 34 Starting and driving SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter e A scraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades e A sturdy flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support Ashovel to dig the vehicle out of snowadrifts Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser voir tank DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE AWARNING e Wet ice 32 F 0 C and freezing rain very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded Whatever the condition drive with cau tion Accelerate and slow down with care If accelerating or downshifting too fast the drive wheels will lose even more traction Allow more stopping distance under these conditions Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement Allow greater following distances on slippery roads Watch for slippery spots glare ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reach ing it Try not to brake while on the ice and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control on slip pery roads Snow can trap dan
330. ires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious ve hicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label located in the driver s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS A CAUTION The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH 25 km h the TPMS may not operate correctly Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly Instruments and controls 2 17 Master warning light This light comes on when various vehicle infor mation display warning
331. is closed its lock will align to the vehicle s lock or unlock status The keyfob button must be held for 0 5 sec ond before the lift gate opens The lift gate must be unlocked to open it with the outside opener handle The switch on the rear pillar cannot be used to open the lift gate A warning chime will sound if the shift selector is moved out of P Park during a power open operation Power Close The power lift gate automatically moves from the fully open position to the secondary position When the lift gate reaches the secondary posi tion the cinching motor engages and pulls the lift gate to its primary latch position Power close takes approximately 7 10 seconds The power close feature can be activated by the switch on the keyfob the instrument panel and the rear pillar The hazard lights flash and a chime sounds to indicate the power close sequence has been started f the outside opener handle is activated while the cinching motor is engaged the cinching motor will disengage and release the latch The keyfob button must be held for 0 5 sec ond before the lift gate closes The switch on the rear pillar can only be used to close the lift gate if the cancel switch is not in the on position Reverse The power lift gate will reverse direction immedi ately during power open or power close if the keyfob instrument panel or rear pillar switch is pushed or if the outside handle is lifted A
332. is auto matically connected with the in vehicle phone Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 107 module when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System if so equipped later in this section Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list and pairing You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave cond
333. is device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the halogen headlight bulb The headlight is a semi sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight halogen bulb Be cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement see your NISSAN dealer A CAUTION High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped When handling the bulb do not touch the glass envelope e DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE HANDS Do not leave the bulb out of the head light reflector for a long period of time as dust moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the per formance of the headlight Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb When aiming adjustment is necessary contact a NISSAN dealer NOTE Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect inside the lens contact a NISSAN dealer FOG LIGHTS if so equipped Replacing the fog light bulb A CAUTION e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may
334. is function depends on each cellular phone The copying procedure from the cellular phone also varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone own er s manual for more details Copy from Outgoing Call Logs Store the name and phone number from the outgoing Call list Copy from Incoming Call Logs Store the name and phone number from the incoming call list Transfer via Bluetooth Transfer a contact from the Bluetooth cellular phone Availability of this function depends on each cellular phone The transferring procedure from the cellular phone also varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone own er s manual for more details Delete Delete a contact that is registered in the phone book 4 112 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Phone il C co ae fone MAKING A CALL To make a call follow the procedure below 1 Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel or the amp 4 switch on the steering wheel The Phone screen will appear on the display 2 Select the Call Phonebook key on the Phone menu and press the ENTER button 3 Select the registered person s name from the list and press the ENTER button Dialing will start and the screen will change to the Call in Progress screen 4 After the call is over perform one of the following to finish the call a Select the Hang up key on the Call in Progress s
335. is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed For more information regarding brake inspections see the appropriate mainte nance schedule information in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide FUSES Two types of fuses are used Type is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment Type is used in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes u u n F HE a T y If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration This will not affect the performance of the fuse Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under hood fuse boxes Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes W W ENGINE COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not come on check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the engine hood 3 Remove th
336. it in the desired position Tilting the moonroof To tilt the moonroof up push the tilt switch to ward the up position When the moonroof is open It will automatically close and then tilt up To tilt the moonroof down push the tilt switch toward the down position 2 Restarting the moonroof sliding switch The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected the electri cal supply interrupted and or some abnormality detected Use the following reset procedure to return moonroof operation to normal 1 If the moonroof lid is open push the tilting switch repeatedly toward the down position 2 to fully close the lid 2 Push and hold the tilting switch for more than 2 seconds toward the down position 2 to reestablish the lid s home position The moonroof should now operate normally Auto reverse function when closing or tilting down the moonroof The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make
337. ite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO AM FM button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 57 TUNE FLDR Tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FLDR knob to the right or left lt gt SEEK CAT and TRACK tuning buttons Press the SEEK CAT 4 button or the TRACK gt button for less than 1 5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequen cies and stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN RPT SCAN tuning button Press the SCAN RPT button to initiate scan tun ing Scan tuning will stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds Press the SCAN RPT but ton again during this 5 second period to stop scan tuning the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN RPT button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station PRESET A B C Station memory opera tions 18 stations can be set for the FM AM and SAT satellite if so equipped radio to the A B and C preset button in any combination of FM AM or SAT stations 1 Choose preset bank A B or C using the PRESET A B C selec
338. ition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Immediately after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the DVD ROM for the navigation system is inserted into the player it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones 4 108 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems If the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide later in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone owner s manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones If reception between
339. ition systems Control panel buttons color screen without Navigation System nos eaneewerdxdenesneevoawhewaas 4 2 How to use the NISSAN controller 4 3 How to select menus on the screen 4 4 How to use the STATUS button 4 4 How to use the INFO button 0008 4 5 How to use the SETTING button 4 9 SID OFF button 0 cece cee cece ee eees 4 16 Control panel buttons color screen with Navigation System if so equipped 05 4 17 How to use the NISSAN controller 4 18 How to use the touch screen 00 eee eee 4 18 Start up SCreen asoccccccecstengctseincieteasss 4 20 How to select menus on the screen 4 20 How to use the STATUS button 4 20 How to use the INFO button 0 4 21 How to use the SETTING button 4 26 WAD OFF button 0 0 cece cece eee eee 4 32 RearView Monitor if so equipped 05 4 33 How to read the displayed lines 4 33 Adjusting the SCreen 0 cece eee eee 4 34 Operan NDS cccnsacraesanene Cartanreasvaa rs 4 34 WEIS esac ceed ace pees dene ee aebae Pete ueaee oes 4 35 Heater and air conditioner automatic 4 36 Automatic operation 0 c cece eee eee 4 36 Manual operation sssusa te odeweewheenennd ast 4 37 Operating UPS aseaun kaw eione as seswaw en seawes 4 37 Rear seat air condition
340. ive an expanded list of commands can be spoken after pushing the TALK lt switch on the steering wheel and the voice com mand menu prompts are turned off In Alternate Command Mode the recognition success rate may be affected because the num ber of available commands and the ways of speaking each command are increased See NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com mand Mode later in this section To improve the recognition success rate when Alternate Command Mode is active try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode See Speaker Adaptation Function later in this section Otherwise it is recommended that Alternate Command Mode be turned off and Standard Mode be used for the best recognition performance For the voice commands for the navigation sys tem refer to the Navigation System Owner s Manual of your vehicle For vehicles in the U S the factory default setting is the Standard Mode See Standard Mode in this section For vehicles in Canada the factory default setting is the Alternate Command Mode See Alternate Command Mode later in this sec tion NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE The Standard Mode enables control of naviga tion phone and vehicle information With this setting active commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system 4 118 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Displaying user gu
341. jack directly under the jack up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point The jack up points are indicated by stamped ar rows on the side of the frame In case of emergency The jack should be used on firm and level ground Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown To lift the vehicle securely hold the jack lever and rod Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual 1 Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be tween the wheel and hub 2 Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight 3 With the wheel nut wrench tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight 4 Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Then with the wheel nut wrench tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated Lower the ve hicle completely AWARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could cause an accident Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This could cause the nuts to become loose Retighten the
342. k ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly The rear sonar system is active when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the shift selector is in R Reverse When sensors detect obstacles within 5 9 ft 1 8 m of the rear bumper a beeping tone is emitted The rear sonar system can be disabled by push ing the OFF switch When the system is disabled the indicator light on the switch will illuminate The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position See Rear sonar system in the Starting and driving section FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH if so equipped AWARNING The front sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper driving The rear sonar system is a convenience but itis not a substitute for proper back ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly The front sonar system is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift selector is in a forward gear position a beeping tone is emitted when the sensors detect obstacles within 3 ft 1 0 m of the front bumper The rear sonar system is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift selector is in R Re verse a beeping tone is emitted when the sensors detect obstacles within 5 9 ft 1 8 m of the rear
343. k Braking System ABS 5 29 Brake fluid 2 0004 8 12 Brake light See stop light 8 30 Brake system ausara 6 oe ee be 5 28 Brake warning light 2 14 Brake wear indicators a 2 20 8 22 Parking brake operation 5 17 Self adjusting brakes 8 22 Brakes a ce aces oe ea oe eS 6 eS SSS amp 8 22 Break in schedule 5 20 Brightness control Instrument panel 2 33 Brightness contrast button 4 16 4 32 Bulb check instrument panel 2 13 Bulb replacement 4 8 30 C Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants Captain s chair adjustment 2nd row Car phone or CBradio 4 92 Cargo light 24 5 66 ee ok ee ee 2 57 Cargo See vehicle loading information 9 13 CD care and cleaning 4 71 CD changer See audio system 4 50 CD player See audio system 4 58 Child restraint with top tether strap 1 37 Child restraints 1 31 1 31 1 32 1 34 Precautions on child restraints 1 32 1 40 1 45 1 50 Top tether strap anchor point locations 1 37 Child safety rear door lock 3 7 Chimes audible reminders 2 20 Cleaning exterior and interior 7 2 Se EEEE E REEERE EEEE T 4 48 4 56 models with navigation system 4 11 4 27 Clock set aoaaa aaa aa a 4 11 4 27 C M V S S certification label aa 9 11 Cold weath
344. k for the last four digits Say six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor mance NOTE When speaking a house number speak the number 0 as zero or oh If the letter O is included in the house number it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 123 Standard Mode command list Category Command COMMAND ACTION Phone Displays Phone function commands Information Displays Vehicle Information Help Displays User Guide Navigation Command COMMAND ACTION Searches for a location by the street address specified and sets a route for continental US and Canada only Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location Displays Navigation function commands Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination Phone Command COMMAND ACTION Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized available during phone number entry Redial Makes a call to the last dialed number Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken as well as star pound and plus
345. ke controller Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and jumper harness that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake con troller To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper harness perform the following procedure 1 Open the driver door Move the seat to the rearmost position Wire color designation for electric trailer brake controller jumper harness WIRE COLOR NOTE RED GREEN Vehicle stop lamp switch to trailer brake controller BLACK Brake controller ground BROWN WHITE Trailer brake controller switched output RED BLUE Trailer brake controller illumination RED Fused trailer brake con troller battery feed B 2 Apply the parking brake to access the 3 Locate the jumper harness connector under jumper harness connector the lower portion of the instrument panel The connector is taped to the wiring harness QD as indicated The connector is marked with a white tag with electric brake connector Technical and consumer information 9 25 4 Peel off the tape and connect the jumper harness to the connector 2 5 Release the parking brake 6 Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller according to the manufacturer s instructions Pre towing tips Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and or unloaded trailer is hitched Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose up or nose down co
346. keyfob sharply against another object Do not change or modify the keyfob Wetting may damage the keyfob If the keyfob gets wet immediately wipe until it is completely dry Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140 F 60 C Do not attach the keyfob with a key holder that contains a magnet e Do not place the keyfob near equip ment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and per sonal computers If a keyfob is lost or stolen NISSAN rec ommends erasing the ID code of that key fob This will prevent the keyfob from un authorized use to unlock the vehicle For information regarding the erasing proce dure please contact a NISSAN dealer T om LPD0209 HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Locking doors 1 Close all windows Remove the key from the ignition switch 2 3 Close the hood and all doors 4 Press the button on the keyfob All the doors lock The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked When the button is pressed with all doors locked the hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re minder that the doors are already locked fa door is open and you press the button the doors will lock but the horn will not beep and the hazard warning lights will not flash The horn may or may not beep For vehicles without navigation system
347. l Also see If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately Such damage is not cov ered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos sible If the engine is overheated con tinued operation of the vehicle may se riously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate ac tion required AND AWD warning light e373 model The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni tion switch is placed in the ON position It turns off soon after the engine is started 2 16 Instruments and controls If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink See 4WD warning light in the Starting and driving section A CAUTION If the warning light comes on or blinks during operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads in the AUTO or 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO positio
348. l if so equipped Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your ve hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Load ing Information label To get the combined weight of occu pants and cargo add the weight of all occupants then add the total luggage weight Examples are shown in the follow ing illustration Technical and consumer information 9 13 Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Trailer Tongue Weight t 6G Do 150 Ib x 2 300 lb 301b x2 60 Ib 300 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg 27 kg 135 kg Occupants Luggage Occupants Luggage tr ECD 150 Ib x 2 300 Ib 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14kg 27 kg Occupants Luggage AERRE CEECEE 150 Ib x 5 750 Ib 30 Ib x 5 150 Ib 70 kg 340 kg 14 kg 70 kg Example 9 14 Technical and consumer information Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 740 Ib 336 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 1 040 Ib 472 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 500 Ib 227 kg LT10152 Steps for determining correct load Locate the statemen
349. l for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry choose Store The system confirms the name location and number The system then asks if you would like to store another location for the same name If you do not wish to store another location the system ends the VR session Edit Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone book entry or to add a 2nd 3rd or 4th phone number to an existing entry When prompted by the system say the name of the entry you wish to edit The system acknowledges the name and asks you for the location you would like to edit Say the name of the location The system acknowledges the location The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers earlier in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the B
350. l the extension sun visor forc edly downward VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 31 MIRRORS REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The night position T reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night Use the day position when driving in daylight hours AWARNING Use the night position only when neces sary because it reduces rear view Clarity 3 32 Pre driving checks and adjustments AUTOMATIC ANTI GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The inside mirror is designed so that it automati cally dims during night time conditions and ac cording to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you The automatic anti glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position The indicator light will illuminate when the auto matic anti glare feature is operating NOTE Do not hang any objects over the sensors 1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors resulting in improper operation t LPD0446 Type A Type A With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi tion press the button as described e To turn off the anti glare feature press the button The indicator light will turn off e To turn on the anti glare feature
351. lacement keys If you still have a key the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys Your dealer can dupli cate your existing key As many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration This is be cause the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System After the registration process these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle Do not allow the immobilizer system key which contains an electrical transponder to come into contact with salt water This could affect system function DOORS When the doors are locked using one of the following methods the doors can not be opened using the inside or outside door handles The doors must be unlocked to open the doors AWARNING e Always have the doors locked while driving Along with the use of seat belts this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open ing the doors and will help keep out intru
352. lay gt gt 44 FF Fast Forward REW Rewind Press the gt fast forward 44 rewind buttons to carry out the fast forward or rewind presentation at 5 times normal play speed Press the gt fast forward 44 rewind buttons again or PLAY button to resume the normal play speed PP Pp NEXT CHAPTER PREVIOUS CHAPTER When the PPI NEXT CHAPTER button is pressed while the DVD is playing the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through programs The DVD will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the M4 PREVIOUS CHAPTER button is pressed the program being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through pro grams The DVD will go back the number of times the button is pressed EE PAUSE When the II PAUSE button on the remote control is pressed the player will pause playing of the media In pause mode the player will show Il on the upper left corner of the dis play until the player is changed to another mode ae Press the STOP button once to stop playing the media The display will show W _ in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds and the last disc position will be stored When the PLAY button is pressed again it will resume at the stored disc track and time position If the STOP button is pressed again when the player is already in Stop mode it will reinitialize
353. lect the Comfort amp Conv key by using the NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but ton The comfort and convenience option screen will be displayed You can set the following operating conditions by selecting the desired item using the NISSAN controller then pressing the ENTER button The indicator light box at the right of the selected item alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER button is pressed Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF Settings gt Comfort amp Conv 8 00 sacr Remote Key Response Lights B Auto Re Lock Time Beep 6 13 DOWN Flash lights with remote key lock unlock Selective Door Unlock Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Intelligent Key Lock Reply X Ot Cee Me mahn 7 Auto Interior Illumination Select to turn on or turn off the illumination of the interior lights when any door is unlocked Auto Headlights Sensitivity Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher right or lower left Auto Headlights Off Delay Select to change the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from O 30 45 60 90 120 150 and 180 second periods Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Select to turn on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati cally according to the vehicle speed Settings gt Comfort amp Conv 8 00 sacr Beep Beep Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Intelligent Key Lo
354. lect to set the length of time before doors automatically re lock Selective Door Unlock When this item is turned on only the driver s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation When the door handle request switch on the driver s or front passenger s side door is pushed to be unlocked only the corresponding door is unlocked first All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute When this item is turned to off all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Select to turn on or turn off the door lock unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch Intelligent Key Lock Reply Select to change the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when a door handle request switch is pushed to lock Select to turn off all sounds made when a door handle request switch is pushed by selecting the OFF key Intelligent Key Unlock Reply Select to change the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when a door handle request switch is pushed to unlock Select to turn off all sounds made when a door handle request switch is pushed by selecting the OFF key Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the driver s seat moving backwards for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignit
355. led a single session and writing more than once is called a multisession ID3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist album title encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album Artist Track title line on the display Windows and Windows Media are regis tered trademarks and trademarks of the Mi crosoft Corporation in the United States of America and or other countries Playback order Music playback order of a CD CF with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated The names of folders not containing MP3 or es CompactFlash is a registered trademark of the WMA files are not shown in the display SanDisk Corporation in the United States of America and or other countries lf there is a file in the top level of the disc Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order FOLDER MP3 or WMA WHA1078 Playback order chart Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 43 Specification chart Supported media CD CD R CD RW CF CD CD R CD RW Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Apple ISO Romeo Joliet SO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported CompactFlash card FAT12
356. lete cycle and if the seats are in the full upright or folded position bring your vehicle in for service If the ignition switch is off the power folding seats are always operational If the ignition switch is on the power folding seats are only operational when the shift selector is in P Park or N Neutral If the engine is started during operation the seat s will temporarily pause NOTE Operating the power folding seats can dis charge the vehicle battery if the vehicle is not running SEAT BELTS J Sit upright and well back PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive even if your seating position includes a supple mental air bag Most U S states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 21 AO f ie Sit upright and weil back AWARNING Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Children should be properly re strained in the rear seat
357. lid up to close Instruments and controls 2 43 WIC1507 Front CUP HOLDERS A CAUTION Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink If the liquid is hot it can scald you or your passenger Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in an accident 2 44 Instruments and controls LIC1373 Adjustable Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder so that the cup is held securely LICO554 2nd row rear of front console To open the 2nd row cup holders rear of the front console lower the lid To close raise the lid 2nd row center console if so equipped Instruments and controls 2 45 WIC1197 Bottle holder A CAUTION Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers 2 46 Instruments and controls 2ND ROW CENTER CONSOLE if so equipped Pull up on the lever to open the console box lid Removing the 2nd row center console box To remove the 2nd row center console box Q Lift out the cup holder tray 2 Pull up on the handle to tilt the console box up 3 Move the console box toward the front of the vehicle and lift it out To reinstall the 2nd row center console box 1 Slide the console box over the base toward the rear of the v
358. lled from its fully retracted position firmly pull the belt and release it Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor 3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown 4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three point seat belts have two modes of operation Emergency Locking Retractor ELR Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts See Child re straints later in this section for more information The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation During normal seat belt use by an occupant the ALR mode should not be activated If it is activated it may cause uncomf
359. lled on the vehicle at vehicle s GVWR the factory Tire size refer to Tire labeling later in this section 8 36 Maintenance and do it yourself Checking tire pressure 1 Remove the valve stem cap from the tire Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side ways or air will escape If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage 3 Remove the gauge Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Add air to the tire as needed If too much air is added press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed Install the valve stem cap Check the pressure of all other tires including the spare Size Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Front Original Tire P265 70R18 240 kPa 35 PSI P275 60R20 Rear Original Tire P265 70R18 240 kPa 35 PSI P275 60R20 Spare Tire P265 70R18 P275 60R20 240 kPa 35 PSI Maintenance and do it yourself 8 37 WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information iden tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
360. llustrated A CAUTION Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground forward or backward as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device Never TOWING RECOMMENDED BY secure the steering wheel by placing NISSAN the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion This may cause damage to the lock mechanism 6 12 Incase of emergency Four wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the ve hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated A CAUTION Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission SOS KRESS KX SO Seer QO ROSS OT S VEHICLE RECOVERY freeing a stuck vehicle Pulling a stuck vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use a tow strap or other device designed specifi cally for vehicle recovery Always follow the re covery device manufacturer s instructions Attach the tow str
361. lly manufacturer s recommendations when using their product SNOW PLOW AWARNING Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing Installing a snowplow may affect vehicle handling This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT Department of Transportation Quality Grades All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B and C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con crete
362. logy and related data are pro vided by Gracenote To view the details of the track touch the Text key on the screen or use the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button The track name and album title are displayed on the screen If a track is not recorded successfully due to skipping sounds the symbol is displayed behind the track number The Music Box audio system cannot perform recording under the following conditions There is not enough space in the hard drive The number of aloums reaches the maximum of 500 The number of tracks reaches the maximum of 3 000 Automatic recording If the Automatic Recording function is turned to ON recording starts when a CD is inserted For more information see Music Box settings later in this section Stopping recording To stop the recording touch the STOP key on the screen If the CD is ejected the audio system is turned off or the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position the recording also stops 4 64 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Music Box Play by album Y XXXXXXX E XXXXXXX Playing recorded songs Select the Music Box audio system by using one of the following methods Press the mode select switch on the steer ing wheel For information see Steering wheel switch for audio control later in this section Press the MUSIC BOX button Give voice commands For inform
363. loth 4 76 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM MES if so equipped This vehicle is equipped with the mobile enter tainment system which enables you to play a Digital Versatile Disc DVD providing the im ages and sounds both in the front and rear dis play screens AWARNING The driver must not attempt to operate or view the Mobile Entertainment Sys tem while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to ve hicle operation Do not attempt to modify the system to display a movie on the front screen while the vehicle is being driven Doing so may distract the driver and may cause a collision and serious personal injury or death A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water Use a damp soft cloth when cleaning the Mobile Entertainment System com ponents Do not use solvents or clean ing solutions Do not attempt to use the system in extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C or above 158 F 70 C To avoid discharging the vehicle battery do not operate the system more than 15 minutes without starting the engine Movies will not be shown on the front display while the vehicle is in
364. lt with pretensioners P 1 66 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag P 1 53 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren P 1 34 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor P 1 48 3rd row bench seat top tether strap anchor P 1 49 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details EXTERIOR FRONT Engine hood P 3 23 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 28 Windshield P 8 19 Power windows P 2 50 Door locks NISSAN Intelligent Key keys P 3 5 3 12 3 2 Mirrors P 3 32 Tire pressure P 9 12 Flat tire P 6 2 Tire chains P 8 41 Replacing bulbs P 8 31 Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 30 Fog light switch P 2 33 Tow hooks if so equipped P 6 13 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 3 EXTERIOR REAR 0 4 Illustrated table of contents no oe aS 8 9 10 11 MAOO OMAA VV a wi NA Roof rack P 2 49 Vehicle loading P 9 13 Glass hatch P 3 28 Rear window washer P 2 29 Glass hatch release P 3 28 Lift gate release P 3 27 Rearview monitor if so equipped P 4 33 Replacing bulbs P 8 31 Fuel filler cap fuel recommendation P 3 28 P 9 3 9 4 Fuel filler door P 3 28 Child safety rear door locks P 3 7 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details P
365. luetooth communication link Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 101 The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers choose Store The system confirms the name location and number then announces that the entry has been stored The system then ends the VR session Delete Use the Delete command to erase one entry from the phone book all entries from the phone book the current redial number or the current call back number To delete entries from the phone book say a name or All entries when prompted by the sys tem The system acknowledges the command and asks you to confirm the deletion To delete the current redial number or call back number say redial number or call back num ber when prompted by the system If a redial number or a call back number exists the system deletes them without asking for confirma tion If there is no number for the entry you are trying to delete the system says so and ends the VR session List names Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book The system recites the
366. lways adjusted by the GPS system Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 27 Clock Format Choose either the 12h 1 2 hour clock display or the 24h 24 hour clock display Offset Adjust Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per minute Daylight Saving Time When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated daylight saving time is on To turn off the daylight saving time touch the ON key the amber indicator light will disappear E peme o To a fena Gon Je 4 Manually select time zone Time Zone Select the Time Zone key the Time Zone screen will appear Select one of the following zones depending on the current location by selecting the correct time zone key and pressing the ENTER button to enable that time zone indicator light will illumi nate for that location Pacific Mountain Central Eastern 4 28 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Atlantic Newfoundland e Hawaii Alaska After selection settings press the BACK button or any other mode button to accept the changes Settings gt Comfort amp Conv 8 00 sacr Clllle Gas 1 13 DOWN Cabin lighting when unlocking doors Auto Interior Illumination Auto Headlights Sensitivity Auto Headlights Off Delay Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Remote Key Response Horn R e y Comfort amp Convenience settings Se
367. m pact disc is played the play pattern can be changed as follows CD ALL DISC MIX 1 DISC MIX ALL DISC MIX MP3 WMA CD ALL DISC MIX 1 DISC MIX 1 FOLDER MIX ALL DISC MIX ALL DISC MIX All discs loaded will be played in a mixed order 1 DISC MIX The tracks on the disc that is cur rently playing will be played in a mixed order 1 FOLDER MIX The tracks in the folder that is currently being accessed will be played in a mixed order SCAN button While listening to a CD press the SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD playing Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track REAR CTRL Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear seat audio controller on Rear Controls UN LOCKED will display Pressing the REAR CTRL button again to turn the rear seat audio controller off Rear Controls LOCKED will display If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio controller the display will show Rear Controls Not Available Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap proximately 1 5 seconds to turn on the rear dis play screen Rear Display ON will display Press and hold the REAR CTRL button again will turn the rear display screen off Rear Display OFF will display If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear display screen the display will show Rear Con trols Not Available vig SPEAKER CONTROL butto
368. mage the brake system The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehi cle s stopping ability Clean the filler cap before removing Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur faces This will damage the paint If fluid is spilled immediately wash the surface with water BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on add DOT 3 brake fluid up to the MAX line If fluid must be added frequently the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer WINDOW WASHER FLUID s Oye WINDOW WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid warning light comes on To fill the window washer fluid reservoir lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer antifreeze Follow the manufacturer s in structions for the mixture ratio Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of win dow washer fluid Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Anti freeze or equivalent A CAUTION
369. mands Say commands when there are minimal background sounds Say voice commands clearly Avoid long pauses between words Say commands after the tone If you find that the system has difficulty recognizing your voice please try using the voice recognition learning mode X WILT eT TT LR lt Useful tips for correct operation You can display useful speaking tips to help the system recognize your voice commands cor rectly 1 Highlight Help on Speaking and press the ENTER button 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller E Settings gt Voice Recognition Bi Command List Puw h E Speaker Adaptation H Ei Alternate Command Mode HI Minimize Voice Feedback Voice recognition settings The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec ognition system are described 1 Highlight Voice Recognition Settings and press the ENTER button 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the iS switch is pressed before the initializa tion completes voice commands will not be ac cepted Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec ognition initialization is completed BEFORE STARTING To get the best recogni
370. mark Manufacturer s 3 Two digit code Tire size 4 XXX XXXX t t 5 6 WDI0396 Three digit code Tire type code Optional Three digit code Date of Manufac ture Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For ex ample the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003 If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire 3 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufactur ers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others 4 Maximum permissible inflation pres sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible in flation pressure Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car ried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in stalled tire Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an in ner tube tube type or not tubeless Maintenance and do it yourself 8 39 T The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown Other Tire related Terminology In addition to the many t
371. me control switch Push the volume control switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 73 mw A Tuning Memory change radio While in one of the preset radio station banks A B or C push the tuning switth W or AN for less than 1 5 seconds to change to the next preset station in memory Seek tuning radio Push the tuning switch or 4AN for more than 1 5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station Next Previous track CD CF Push the tuning switth or 4AN for less than 1 5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks This system searches for the blank intervals be tween selections If there is a blank interval within 1 program or there is no interval between pro grams the system may not stop in the desired or expected location Next Previous track Music Box Push the tuning switth or __ for less than 1 5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks Push and hold the tuning switch W or AN for more than 1 5 seconds to change playlists When the last playlist is playing the next playlist will be selected Change disc CD if so equipped Push the tuning switch V or 7S for more than 1 5 seconds to change the playing disc
372. mediately after inflation several front air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may se verely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or front end structure This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing mate rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers on the seat that are not specifi cally designed to assure proper air bag operation Additionally do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica tion sensor pressure sensor No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wirin
373. mpatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle With this sys tem you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child re straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH This information may also be in the in structions provided by the child restraint manu facturer Top tether anchor AWARNING If the cargo cover if so equipped con tacts the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor re move the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its attachment location If the cargo cover is not removed it may damage the top tether strap during a collision A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether LRS0662 strap is damaged LRS0340 LATCH rigid mounted attachment Do not allow cargo to contact the top 2nd row captain s chairs if so equipped The child restraint top tether strap must be used tether strap when it is attached to the Top tether anchor point locations when installing the child restraint with the LATCH top tether anchor Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top Anchor points are located in the following loca tether strap Cargo that is not properly tions secured or cargo that contacts the top lower anchor attachments or seat belts See
374. much as possible Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged 5 20 Starting and driving INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position Drive at moderate speeds on the highway Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking Maintain a safe distance behind other ve hicles Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions On level roads shift into high gear as soon as possible Avoid unnecessary engine Idling Keep your engine tuned up Follow the recommended periodic mainte nance schedule Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres sure Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Keep the front wheels in correct alignment Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy Use the air conditioner only when necessary When cruising at highway speeds it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag For vehicles equipped with use 4H or 4L position only when necessary Four wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD AWARNING For 4WD equipped vehicles do not at tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with th
375. must be ad vised if non genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle And some states have enacted laws that restrict Insurance companies from authorizing the use of non genuine Collision parts during the new vehicle warranty These laws help protect you so you can take action to protect yourself It s your right If you should need further information visit us at www nissanuSa com for U S customers or www nissan ca for Canadian customers Technical and consumer information 9 33 MEMO 9 34 Technical and consumer information 10 Index 4WD warning light 2 16 A Adjusting pedal position 3 30 Air bag See supplemental restraint system 1 53 Air bag system Front See supplemental front impact airbagsystem 04 1 61 Air bag warning labels 1 67 Air bag warning light 1 68 2 18 Air cleaner housing filter 8 17 Air conditioner Air conditioner service 4 39 Air conditioner specification label 9 12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 9 7 Heater and air conditioner controls 4 36 Rear seat air conditioner 4 38 Servicing airconditioner 4 39 Alarm system See vehicle security system 2 25 Anchor point locations 1 37 Antenna 6 idee kh ee eww we ee 4 76 Anti lock brake warning light 2 14 Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 29
376. n Press the i button to turn the rear speakers off and the headphones on Press this button again to turn rear seat speakers back on and the headphones off 4 52 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems CD EJECT Current Selected disc Press the amp button then press the slot number 1 6 for the desired disc The compact disc will be ejected If no slot num ber 1 6 is pressed the current loaded disc will be ejected If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds the disc will reload All discs Press and hold the amp button for more than 1 5 seconds The compact discs will be ejected one by one If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds or the amp button is pressed again during the eject sequence the entire disc eject sequence will be can celed When this button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played CD IN indicator The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only AUX jack The AUX jack 4 is located below the air condi tioner controls The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape player MP3 player or a laptop computer Press the DISC AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX jack Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognitio
377. n stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N posi tion and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible oe Low fuel warning light This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is conve nient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty KOJ Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the warning light will illuminate If you select the tire pressure information in the display if so equipped the LOW PRESSURE warning message will be dis played The tire pressure for each tire will also be displayed When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom mended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the
378. n be turned off without waiting for 15 seconds by performing one of the following op erations Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key Switching the room light switch to the OFF position Opening windows if so equipped The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simulta neously To open the windows press the but ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked The door windows will open while pressing the button on the Intelligent Key The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key Releasing the rear lift gate Press the T button for longer than 0 5 sec onds to open the rear lift gate The rear lift gate release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 19 Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 1 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds The panic alarm stops when It has run for 25 seconds or 3 20 Pre driving checks and adjustments Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key Pushing the request switch on the driver or passenger door with the Intelligent Key in range of the doo
379. n for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta geous Do not downshift into the 4 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 4 position Starting and driving 5 15 4H 62 MPH 100 km h 4LO 31 MPH 50 km h 3 Third gear Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta geous 2 Second gear Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak ing on downhill grades Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 2 position 2WD and AUTO 71 MPH 115 km h w o tow mode 62 MPH 100 km h w tow mode 4H 71 MPH 115 km h w o tow mode 62 MPH 100 km h w tow mode 4LO 31 MPH 50 km h w o tow mode 5 16 Starting and driving 27 MPH 44 km h w tow mode 1 Low gear Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or slow driving through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 1 position 2WD and AUTO 43 MPH 70 km h w o tow mode 37 MPH 60 km h w tow mode 4H 43 MPH 70 km h w o tow mode 37 MPH 60 km h w tow mode 4LO 19 MPH 80 km h w o tow mode 16 MPH 27 km h w tow mode Shift lock release If the battery is discharged the shift selector may
380. n of this manual A CAUTION e If the power lift gate does not stay open Manual lift gate release Power lift gate release or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at any time while a continuous warning Manual lift gate if so equipped Power lift gate if so equipped chime sounds do not operate the lift gate There may be a pressure loss in LPD0251 LPD0252 If the lift gate cannot be locked or unlocked with If the lift gate cannot be opened with the door the door lock switch or the keyfob due to a lock switch or keyfob due to a discharged battery one or both of the lift gate gas stays discharged battery follow these steps follow these steps Have the lift gate inspected by a a l NISSAN dealer 1 Remove the cover on the inside of the lift 1 Remove the cover on the inside of the lift gate gate Do not activate the power lift gate if one or both of the lift gate gas stays are 2 Move the lever up to lock or down to unlock 2 Move the lever up to open the lift gate removed Damage to the lift gate or power lift gate mechanisms may occur Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 27 GLASS HATCH To open pull up on the smaller outside handle to release the glass hatch then pull up on the glass hatch To close lower and push the glass hatch down securely 3 28 Pre driving checks and adjustments NOTE The lift gate must be unlocked in order to open the glass hatch AWARNING Do not drive with the glass hatch o
381. n systems 4 53 2 PRESET DISC A B C SCAN RPT 1 PRESET A B C button 7 _SEEK CAT button 13 AM FM SAT button 2 DISC AUX button 8 TUNE FLDR and AUDIO control knob 14 MUSIC BOX button 3 AM speaker control button 9 CompactFlash insert slot 4 REAR CTRL button 10 Station select 1 6 buttons 5 SCAN RPT button 11 amp CD eject button 6 TRACK button 12 VOL ON OFF control knob 4 54 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems When the AM FM SAT button is pressed the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite re ceiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions earlier in this section The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and then push the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode radio or CD which was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the VOL ON OFF control knob Turn the
382. n the display Once you have selected a zone number the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds NOTE Use zone number 5 for Hawaii Inaccurate compass direction The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function If the correct direction is not shown follow this procedure instruments and controls 2 11 With the display turned on press and hold the button for about 10 seconds The CAL icon in the compass display will illu minate Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle one and a half circles at a maximum speed of 6 MPH 10 km h After completing the circles the display should return to normal If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment have the compass checked at an authorized NISSAN dealer The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve hicle moves to an area where the geomag netism is stabilized If a magnet is located in or near the overhead console in the front of the vehicle or the vehicle is driven where the terrestrial mag netism is disturbed the compass display may not indicate the correct direction 2 12 Instruments and controls A CAUTION Do not install a ski rack antenna etc which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet They affect the op eration of the
383. n the zone shown in the illustration The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions A CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera ture near the hot H end of the normal range reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature If the gauge is over the nor mal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible If the engine is over heated continued operation of the ve hicle may seriously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action required FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank The gauge may move slightly during braking turning acceleration or going up or down hills The gauge needle returns to E Empty after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis ters E Empty The jib indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the driver s side of the vehicle A CAUTION if the vehicle runs out of fuel the HAINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may come on Refuel as soon as possible After a few driving trips the ENGINE light should turn off If the SOON light remains on after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Mal function I
384. n you place the ignition switch in the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational If the light does not come on or does not go off have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer acy turn signal hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF indicator light This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF the transfer case is in the 4LO position PXJ model or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control 2 20 Instruments and controls system is not functioning properly This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper ating Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving sec tion of this manual The Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica tor light while you are driving have the Vehicle Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating you might feel slight vibration or hear the sys
385. nce and do it yourself 1 Battery 2 Fuse fusible link box 3 Transmission dipstick 4 Engine oil filler cap 5 Brake fluid reservoir 6 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 7 Air cleaner 8 Drive belt location 9 Radiator cap 10 Power steering fluid reservoir 11 Engine oil dipstick 12 Engine coolant reservoir NOTE Engine cover removed for clarity ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant to provide year round anti freeze and coolant protection The anti freeze so lution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors Ad ditional engine cooling system additives are not necessary AWARNING Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Wait until the engine and radiator cool down Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual The radiator is equipped with a pres sure type radiator cap To prevent en gine damage use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap A CAUTION When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant green or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50 anti freeze and 50 demineralized or distilled water The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors such as or a
386. ncentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper CQ Intermittent INT intermittent operation not adjustable 2 ON continuous low speed operation Push the switch forward 3 to operate the washer The wiper will also operate several times AWARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the window and ob scure your vision Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash the rear window A CAUTION e Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds e Do not operate the washer if the reser voir tank is empty Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom mended levels before pouring t
387. nder 2 7 q Reminder 3 Reminder 4 6000 12000 18000 miles Maintenance items Press the INFO button and select the Mainte nance key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button the maintenance infor mation will be displayed on the screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 23 i information gt Reminder 8 00 max 0 6000 12000 18000 TE Distance C aa a l interval loamme on Interval Reminder RAED 6000 12000 18000 miles TMU ends PIII Changing the maintenance interval Select one of the Reminder 1 4 keys using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button to display the screen to change the main tenance interval Select the Interval key using the NISSAN con troller and press the ENTER button Use the NISSAN controller to change the maintenance interval to accept the changes press the BACK button Resetting the maintenance interval To reset the reminder schedule distance to O mi km select the Reset Distance key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button 4 24 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA0839 Displaying the maintenance notice re minder Select the Interval Reminder ON key and press the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set mainte nance interval The indicator light will illuminate when it is ON The MA
388. ndicator Light MIL later in this section instruments and controls 2 7 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys tem oil pressure while the engine is running The needle should be in the middle of the gauge when the engine is running 2 8 Instruments and controls A CAUTION This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level Use the dipstick to check the oil level See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section If the gauge needle does not move with the proper amount of engine oil have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine VOLTMETER When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the voltmeter indicates the battery volt age When the engine is running It indicates the generator voltage While cranking the engine the volts drop below the normal range If the needle is not in the normal range 11 15 volts while the engine is running it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE GAUGE This gauge indicates the temperature of the au tomatic transmission fluid The automatic trans mission fluid temperature is in the normal range C when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration A CAUTION
389. ndicator blinks the road condi tions may be slippery Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions See Slip indicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light in the In struments and controls section Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the system the SLIP and Be indicator lights come on in the instrument panel If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO the Be indicator light will come on and the VDC system will be turned off See Transfer case shifting procedures earlier in this section As long as these indicator lights are on the traction control function is canceled If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy namic Control system off using the VDC OFF switch most VDC functions will be turned off The SLIP indicator light will flash if wheel spin is detected The ABS will still operate with the VDC system off When the VDC and Traction Control System TCS system is operating you may feel a pulsa tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibra tion from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working prop erly The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an
390. ndition check for improper tongue load overload worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition 9 26 Technical and consumer information Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low Load the trailer so approximately 60 of the trailer load is in the front half and 40 is in the back half Also make sure the load is balanced side to side Check your hitch trailer tire pressure ve hicle tire pressure trailer light operation and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal state or local regulations If not install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic Steering stability and braking perfor mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert ently becoming unlatched Avoid abrupt starts acceleration or stops
391. nformation if so equipped To display tire pressure information press the INFO button then select the Tire Pressure key using the NISSAN controller and press the EN TER button Pressure indication in psi on the screen indi cates that the pressure is being measured After a few driving trips the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position 4 6 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s traveling condition and the temperature In case of low tire pressure a message is dis played on the screen LOW PRESSURE Check All Tires AWARNING When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Con tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Information gt Trip Computer 2 00 Elapsed Time 6 33 32 Reset 18 2miles Reset 2 8MPH Reset Reset All Driving Distance a Average Speed i Trip
392. ng any fabric protector read the manu facturer s recommendations Some fabric pro tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens AWARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This can also affect the opera tion of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury 7 4 Appearance and care A CAUTION Never use benzine thinner or any simi lar material Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly Do not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners as they may damage the leather s natural finish Never use fabric protectors unless rec ommended by the manufacturer Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may dam age the lens cover AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior If you use an air freshener take the following precautions Hanging type air fresheners can cause per manent discoloration when they contact ve hicle interior surfaces Place the air fresh ener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface Liquid type air fresheners typically clip on the vents Thes
393. ng checks and adjustments 3 21 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle the vehicle system may respond differently than expected Move the shift selector to the P Park position The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis When stopping the engine play and the inside warning chime sounds continuously When opening the driver s door to get out The inside warning chime sounds The igniionswichieihithe ACC pasion Place the ignition switch in the OFF of the vehicle continuously position The NO KEY warning appears on the Place the ignition switch in the OFF display the outside chime sounds 3 times _ The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position and the inside warning chime sounds for position approximately 3 seconds The shift selector is not in the P Park position When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle The NO KEY warning appears on the dis The ignition switch is in the ACC position Move the shift selector to the P Park posi play and the outside chime sounds and the shift selector is not in the P Park tion and place the ignition switch in the continuously position OFF position When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately asics Carry the Intelligent Key with you le knob turned to LOCK 3 seconds and all the doors unlock D i a VS
394. ng on the vehicle speed Fail safe When the fail safe operation occurs please note that the transmission will be locked in any of the forward gears according to the condition If the vehicle is driven under extreme con ditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 seconds Then turn the ignition switch back to the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis sion and repair it if necessary PARKING BRAKE AWARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully re leased before driving Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle Do not use the shift selector in place of the parking brake When parking be sure the parking brake is fully engaged Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle They could release the parking brake and cause an accident Starting and driving 5 17 LSD0158 To engage Firmly depress the parking brake To release 1 2 Firmly apply the foot brake Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release B
395. ng the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be needed For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Have a dam aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when per forming periodic maintenance cleaning the ve hicle etc Additional information on the following items with an is found later in this sec tion Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort Keep the floor mat away from the pedal
396. ng the player Files with extensions other than MP3 WMA mp3 or wma cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Cannot play Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3 WMA writing applica tions or other text editing applications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the CD CF is protected by copyright Poor sound quality Check if the CD CF is scratched or dirty It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 WMA CD CF or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts before the music starts playing playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the Music cuts off or skips awe a specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data files Moves immediately to the When a non MP3 WMA file has been given an extension of MP3 WMA mp3 or wma or when play is prohibited by copyright protection the next song when playing player will skip to the next song
397. nge may damage the engine cooling system Demineral ized or dis tilled water Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Outside temperature down to Coolant or equivalent CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level add coolant to the MAX level If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur ized tank When installing the cap tighten it until a clicking sound is heard Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7 If the cooling system frequently requires coolant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat ing AWARNING To avoid the danger of being scalded never change the coolant when the en gine is hot e Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroug
398. nnot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal 1 2 3 Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents Firmly apply the parking brake Move the shift selector to the P Park position To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline It is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL NO CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen ter of the road if it moves Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion Starting and driving 5 27 POWER STEERING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump driven by the engine to assist steering If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks you will still have control of the vehicle However much greater steering effort is needed especially in sharp turns and at low speeds AWARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist
399. non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle and may also affect the warranty coverage Maintenance If you operate your vehicle using E 85 fuel follow the correct maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide A CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability Technical and consumer information 9 5 API certification mark ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants earlier in this section NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API certification or Interna tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval 9 6 Technical and consumer information API service symbol Committee ILSAC certification and SAE vis cosity standard These oils have the API certifica tion mark on the front of the container Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives The use of an oil additive is not neces sary when the proper oil type is used and main tenance inte
400. not be moved from the P Park position even with the brake pedal depressed To move the shift selector release the shift lock The shift selector can be moved to N Neutral However the steering wheel will be locked un less the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi tion This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged To push the shift lock release complete the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion and remove the key 2 Apply the parking brake 3 Remove the shift lock release cover as shown 4 Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down 5 Move the shift selector to the N Neutral position while holding down the shift lock release 6 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park have a NISSAN dealer check the auto matic transmission system as soon as possible AWARNING If the shift selector cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunction ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others Accelerator downshift in D position For passing or hill climbing depress the accel erator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmis sion down into a lower gear dependi
401. ns and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted They may not inflate in certain side collisions Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers As a result certain vehicle movements for example during severe off roading may cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag operation When the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Side air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants Curtain and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions in all rows They can help save lives and reduce serious
402. nt or sud den stop 2 40 Instruments and controls CONSOLE BOX Console box storage trays ee iz Cc ya w Net Vin O i b em Console box storage Pull up on the lever 1 to open the console box lid Console box lock Use the master key to lock or unlock 2 the console box GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle Use the master key when locking or unlocking the glove box AWARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder push and release Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder AWARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident Instruments and controls 2 41 A CAUTION e Do not use for anything other than sunglasses e Do not leave sunglasses in the sun glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight The heat may damage the sunglasses LICO575 MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKET The seatback pocket is located on the back of the driver seat The pocket can be used to store maps 2 42 Instruments and controls LICO569 LICO570 Medium bin if so equipped Storage bins AWARNING Keep storage bins closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop Push the button to open a storage bin Large bin LICO568 Small bin OVERHEAD CONSOLE Push the
403. o 8 00 Sanco its artist using the keypad displayed on the TT screen E i Track EN E For information see How to use the touch ee XXXXXXX izj Bi screen earlier in this section lt 1 Mood Categories The category of the track can also be set to E Deleted Items Album a Rock Pop Latin Jazz R amp B Hip Hop Si Search Missing Titles XXXXXXX il rei Club Dance Punk Reggae Folk Blues aq H el Country Metal Easy Listening New Age P Music Box Settings i Vibe Soundtrack Gospel amp Religious World 1 6 i Shows the amount of space available for recording Select the mood category for the track Classical Children s and Others e Remove Track Reset the mood setting of a track Music Box text display Restoring deleted data While listening to a track in the Music Box audio Deleted music data can be restored by perform system you can view certain text Touch the Text ing the following o display the following information for each 1 Touch the Menu key and then the touch the ae Music Box System Info key on the screen e Set Mood a 2 Touch the Deleted Items key and then the Set the moar category Bie tack to a Album Track key laxing Music Lively Music Slow Music or Upbeat Music 3 Touch the Restore Album Track key to re store the deleted music data e Delete Track Delete the track being played 4 68 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognit
404. o phone and voice recognition systems e Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling or heating auto This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a con stant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Push the AUTO button on AUTO will be displayed 2 Turn the driver s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature Driver and passenger tem peratures can be set independently Press DUAL to activate dual climate control func tions Turn the passenger s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired passenger s temperature Adjust the temperature dial to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution fan speed and A C on off are also controlled automatically A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a mal function Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Push the defroster control button Y to turn the system on The display will show the defrost icon 2 Turn the temperature dial to the l
405. o one side during braking To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly Parking brake break in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and or drum rotors are replaced in order to assure the best brake performance This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS AWARNING e The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot pre vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remem ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping dis tances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow covered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you Ultimately the driver is respon sible for safety Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness When replacing tires install the specified size of tires on all four wheels When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size and type as s
406. o produce maximum power and smooth operation The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment Starting the vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P Park position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector into a driving gear 3 Release the foot brake then gradually start the vehicle in motion The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P Park to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear posi tions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF or ACC position eI Q EJ To move the shift selector Shift while depressing the brake pedal gt Shift without depressing brake pedal Shifting After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector out of the P Park position AWARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift selec tor is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC position for any
407. o start your vehicle Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers Always place the container on the ground when filling Do not use electronic devices when filling Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill ing it Use only approved portable fuel con tainers for flammable liquid A CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door label can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body flush it away with water to avoid paint damage Insert the fuel filler cap straight into the fuel filler tube then tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate If the ENGINE light SOON illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The ENGINE light should turn off after a few driving trips If the ENGINE light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see the Malfunction Indicator Lig
408. o with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause personal injury 9 16 Technical and consumer information Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could oc cur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause per sonal injury Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak ing distances This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the _ vehicle s warranty MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the vehicle is loaded drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not ex ceed either of the gross axle weight rat ings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label If weight ratings are exceeded move or re move items to bring all weights below the ratings TOWING A TRAILER AWARNING Overloading
409. ob returns to the lock position The mechanical key can be used for operation in the same way as an ordinary key Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3 A CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot See Doors in this section and Storage in the Instruments and Controls section of this manual Valet hand off When you have to leave a key with a valet give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me chanical key with you to protect your belongings To prevent the glove box or console box from being opened during valet hand off follow the procedure below 1 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 2 Lock the glove box or console box with the mechanical key 3 Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you See Storage in the Instruments and controls section of this manual 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle These keys have a transponder chip in the key head The master key can be used for all the locks The valet key cannot be used for the console box lock To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone give them the valet key only Never leave these keys in the vehicle Additional or rep
410. occupant or object on the seat and seat belt tension Based on information from the sensors only one front air bag may inflate in a crash depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted Additionally the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions depending on the weight detected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used If the front passenger air bag is OFF the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated if the seat is unoccupied the light will not be illuminated but the air bag will be off See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system If you have any questions about your air bag system please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability you may also contact NISSAN Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner s Manual When a front air bag inflates a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken to not inhale it as it may Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Front air bags along with the use of sea
411. ode is activated and key and press the ENTER button the setting menu is expanded to include the ment panel Pe Cone HOM MNC SS ese sae oe Settings menu later in this section for an Na the screen Select the OK key and press ahationoi ih ti 2 Highlight the Others key on the display and the ENTER button to activate the Alternate i a a calc then press the ENTER button Command Mode Displaying the command list 3 Highlight the Voice Recognition key and then press the ENTER button If you are controlling the system by voice com mands for the first time or do not know the appropriate voice command perform the follow ing procedure for displaying the voice command list available only in Alternate Command Mode Press the C4 switch listen for the tone and say Help The system will respond by display ing the command list main menu Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 131 Information 8 00 ee Sets raon ca eames ff wenn p e ff esse ee seee Information gt Command List Navigation Commands g Phone Commands meee Information gt Command List lt a Phone Commands Audio Commands Audio Commands Information Commands E Ee Push the TALK swiloh to start voice e amp Push the TALK swilch to start voice recognition Only manual controls such as the touch screen 1 Press the INFO button on
412. oice recognition systems Settings gt Speaker Adaptation Sw Music Box Changes the source of the audio system to the Music Box amp To end tutorial push the TALK switch for 2 seconds 7 The system requests that you repeat a com mand after a tone This command is also displayed on the screen 8 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to speak the command that the system requested 9 When the system has recognized the voice command the voice of the user is learned Press the 4 switch or the BACK button to return to the previous screen If the system has learned the command correctly the voice command indicator on the screen turns on Settings gt Speaker Adaptation Edit Name Bi Store Result Bi Reset Result al Continuous Learning BI po SS Speaker Adaptation function settings Edit Name Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen Store Result When this item is turned to ON the Voice Rec ognition system can easily recognize the user s voice that it has learned Reset Result Resets the user s voice that the Voice Recogni tion system has learned Continuous Learning When this item is turned to ON you can have the system learn the voice commands in succession without selecting commands one by one Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 141 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system sh
413. oint and play BACK Press the BACK button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu SUBTITLE Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle selection menu Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle through each available subtitle AUDIO Press the AUDIO button to call up the audio menu Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle through each available audio track ANGLE Press the ANGLE button to call up the camera angle menu Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle through each available angle CLEAR Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric inputs if actuated prior to expiration of the 3 second timer NUMERIC KEYPAD 0 9 amp gt 10 Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access disc chapters titles or tracks by inputting their numeric value Use the gt 10 button to input numbers greater than or equal to 10 Up to 3 digits can be inputted when selecting the chapter title track number 4 88 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will continuously shift the previously input number to the left The chapter title track number will be automati cally selected if valid based on media content if 3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs The operator can cancel the input chapter title track number by actuating the CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the 3 second timer These
414. ols LOCKED will display If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio controller the display will show Rear Controls Not Available Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap proximately 1 5 seconds to turn the rear display screen on Rear Display ON will display Press and hold the REAR CTRL button again to turn the rear display screen off Rear Display OFF will display If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear display screen the display will show Rear Con trols Not Available Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 59 N a SPEAKER CONTROL button Press the button to turn the rear speakers off and the headphones on Press this button again to turn rear seat speakers back on and the headphones off 4 CD EJECT button Whenthe amp button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected When the amp button is pressed while the compact disc Is being played the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off AUX jack The AUX jack 4 is located below the air condi tioner controls The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape player MP3 player or a laptop computer Press the DISC AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX Jack 4 60 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems COMPACTFLASH CF PLAYER OPERATION if
415. omatic 3 36 Driving Cold weather driving 5 33 Driving with automatic transmission 5 14 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 E Economy Tels d ei sg seara a ee we 5 20 Emission control information label 9 11 Emission control system warranty 9 30 Engine Before starting the engine a 5 12 Capacities and recommended tuellubricants es st rs serate ea 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Changing engine oll 8 9 Changing engine oilfilter 8 10 Checking engine coolant level 8 7 Checking engine oil level 8 8 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Engine cooling system 8 7 GUNG Ol a wos eames me Ad wha E 8 8 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 6 Engine oil viscosity 6 ee ee ees 9 6 Engine serialnumber 9 11 Engine specifications 9 8 Starting the engine 5 12 Engine oil pressure gauge 2 8 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 15 Enter button aod aoe Wh we le ee a 4 2 4 17 Event datarecorders 9 32 Exhaust gas Carbon monoxide 5 2 Eyeglass case 2 20 2 eae 2 41 E Flashers See hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 FIA AO ae a he Se ee a E oe om Bd 6 2 Floor mat positioning aid saaa a aaa 7 5 Fluid Brake flu
416. on as you can after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain after driving on coastal roads when contaminants such as soot bird drop pings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area When it is necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water 7 2 Appearance and care A CAUTION Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent Some car washes espe cially brushless ones use some acid for cleaning The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components causing them to crack This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to function properly Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used e Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap strong chemical deter gents gasoline or solvents Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun light or while the vehicle body is hot as the surface may become water spotted e Avoid using tight napped or rough cloth
417. ond after turning the ignition switch to the ON position While the engine is running the 4WD shift indi cator light will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other When the shifting is com pleted the 4WD shift indicator light will come on If the indicator light does not come on immediately make sure the area around the vehicle is safe and drive the vehicle straight accelerate or decelerate or move the vehicle in re verse then shift the 4WD shift switch If the 4WD warning light comes on the 4WD indicator light goes out A CAUTION When the 4WD shift switch is turned to the AUTO position at low ambient tem peratures the 4WD shift indicator light may show 4H If this happens all four wheels are driven as torque distribution is in the 4H position Be careful as the vehicle may become difficult to turn When the vehicle is driven the 4WD shift indicator light should change to AUTO If the 4WD shift indicator light indica tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4H position at low ambient temperatures the 2WD mode may be being engaged due to malfunctioning drive system If the indicator does not return to normal and the 4WD warning light comes on have the system checked by the nearest NISSAN dealer Starting and driving 5 25 4WD warning light Comes on or blinks Warn
418. ontrol switch 2 30 Ignition switch oS kien dae 6 oe oe 5 9 Power door lock switch 3 6 Rear sonar system off switch 2 36 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWItCh 2 4 4 4 ee ow ES ae ee ee we a 2 30 Rear window wiper and washer switches aoao a a a 2 29 Turn signal switch 2 33 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off SWITCH aoaaa ace ele a a 2 36 T Tachometer aaao 2 6 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 16 Theft NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine Slats 2 hse aoaaa Roa 2 27 3 4 5 12 Third row power folding seats 1 20 Three way catalyst aoao 5 2 Tilting steering wheel 3 30 Tire FUNC a a tee ek a ce ert 8 aA 6 2 Sparetire 2 00004 6 3 Tire and Loading Information label 9 12 Tire chains sie oo ae che Fa ty owe 8 41 Tire placatd eek wee a tee we Bs 9 12 Tire pressure 2 2 eee eee 8 34 Tire rotation amp ais Gow amp Rank oe eww amp 8 41 Tires of 4 wheel drive 8 43 Types of tires 2 ee 8 40 Uniform tire quality grading 9 29 Wheels andtires 8 34 Wheel tire size 2 2054 9 9 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light 2 16 Tire pressure display 4 6 4 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Tire rotation maintenance r
419. operation Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de sired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again move the switch forward and move your body forward The seatback will move forward 1 4 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be re clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve hicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park Seat lifter driver s seat Lumbar support driver s seat 2ND ROW CAPTAIN S CHAIR ADJUSTMENT if so equipped down to adjust the angle and height of the seat support to the driver Move the lever up or down Reclining cushion to adjust the seat lumbar area Push the front or rear end of the switch up or The lumbar support feature provides lower back To recline the seatback pull up on the lever and lean back The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat back for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when
420. or refer to Setup later in this section for more information on changing priorities 7 The system will ask if you would like to select a custom ring tone Follow the instruc tions provided by the system or refer to Setup later in this section for more infor mation on selecting ringtones Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu Call A Number speak digits Dial 1 Press the CS wheel A tone will sound button on the steering 2 Say Call The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands Say Call International to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters 3 Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number try entering the number in the following groups 3 digit area code 4 98 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 3 digit prefix and the last 4 digits For ex ample 555 121 3354 can be said as five five five as the 1st group then one two one as the 2nd group and three three five four as the 3rd group For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say In ternational See How to say numbers ear lier in this section for more information 4 When you have finished speaking the phone number the system repeats it back and an nounces the
421. or child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Installing top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seat ing positions that do not have a top tether anchor 1 44 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0697 Forward facing step 6 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child re straints fit in all types of vehicles 7 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child re
422. or easy recognition Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words Giving voice commands 1 Press and release the CS switch located on the steering wheel Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 137 Sy Voice Recognition w w Dial Number w Phonebook amp To show additional commands say Help 2 A list of commands appears on the screen and the system announces Please say a command from the displayed list or say Help to show all commands 3 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from 2 to B speak a command 4 Once a command is recognized the system will announce the recognized command and perform the requested action If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice after the tone Operating tips Say a command after the tone Voice com mands cannot be accepted when the icon is If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice Press the 4 switch on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen If you want to cancel the command press and hold the switch The message Voice cancelled will be announced If you want to adjust the volume of the sys tem feedback push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the a
423. or handles or the rear liftgate opener switch When locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be fore operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been de tected by the Intelligent Key system Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci dentally locked in the vehicle lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system When the driver s side door is open the doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds NOTE The doors may not lock when the Intelli gent Key is in the same hand that is oper ating the request switch to lock the door Put the intelligent key in a purse pocket or your other hand A CAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the glove box or a storage bin When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the door pockets When the Intelligent Key is placed in side or near metallic materials Unlocking doors 1 Carry the Intelligent Key 2 Push the door handle request switch 3 The hazard warning lights
424. or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling braking and perfor mance and may lead to accidents A CAUTION Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged For the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri marily to carry passengers and cargo Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drive train steering brak ing and other systems A NISSAN Towing Guide U S only is available on the website at www nissanusa com This guide includes information on trailer towing ca pability and the special equipment required for proper towing MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this sec tion The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight When towing a trailer load of 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR should not exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load Specification chart The GCWR equals the
425. ortable seat belt ten sion It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section 1 25 AWARNING When fastening the seat belts be certain that the seatbacks are completely se cured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically re tracts Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor When the vehicle slows down rapidly 1 26 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation as follows Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly The retractor should lock and re strict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion see a NISSAN dealer Center of the 3rd row bench seat The 3rd row center seat belt has a connector tongue Q and a seat belt tongue Both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely latched for proper seat belt opera tion AWARNING Always fasten the connector tongue and the seat belt in the order sho
426. ot write draw or attach anything on any side of the DVD Do not store the DVD in locations with direct sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity Always place discs in the storage case when they are not being used Do not put on any sticker or write anything on either surface of the DVD Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 89 DVD player operation precautions Do not use the following DVDs as they may cause the DVD player to malfunction 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter DVDs with a region code other than 1 The region code A is displayed in a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD DVDs that are not round DVDs with a paper label DVDs that are warped scratched or have unequal edges Recordable digital video discs DVD R Rewritable digital video discs DVD RW If a DVD with a paper label is used and becomes jammed you may be able to reset the unit and eject the jammed disc with the following procedure 1 Record the radio presets 2 Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery for five minutes 3 Reconnect the negative battery termi nal 4 Check to see if the jammed DVD has been ejected If it has not try to eject the DVD by pushing the eject button 4 90 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 5 If the disc cannot be ejected see your NISSAN dealer for further assistance 6 Re program t
427. ould respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number one until the problem is resolved Displays COMMAND NOT RECOG NIZED or the system fails to interpret the command correctly The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in the phonebook Ensure that the command format is valid see Standard Mode command list or Alternate Command Mode command list earlier in this section Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defrost on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized 1 Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored See Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System if so equipped earlier in this section 2 Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag 4 142 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide 008 5 2 Three Way catalyst a n eee ee sew ear eewnn dae ox 5 2 On pavement and of
428. our shoulder and across your chest Never run the lap shoulder belt over your ab dominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts Check with your doctor for specific recommendations THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR AWARNING Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly 1 24 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0174 Manual seat shown Fastening the seat belts 1 Adjust the seat See Seats earlier in this section 2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat If the seat belt cannot be pu
429. ove box lid WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent Then rinse the blades with clear water If your wind shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper replace the blades A CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam age the windshield and impair driver vision Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn 1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield 2 Push the release tab then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove 3 Remove the wiper blade 4 Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place 5 Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself 6 Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield A CAUTION After wiper blade replacement return the wiper arm to its original position otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass o
430. ox Turns to the Music Box hard disk drive audio system CD Starts to play a CD Vehicle Information Command Climate Control Command COMMAND ACTION Climate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode Climate Control Off Turns the climate control system off Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 135 4 Highlight the User Guide key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER Information gt User Guide button Information gt User Guide i Getting Started E LEN Using the Address Book BI 2 Finding a Street Address g Ei Finding a Street Address nee a 12 Placing Calls Bi Help on Speaking g 2 Plecingcais i ae rl DOWN Push the ENTER switch to select JEN Voice Recognition Settings Bi HE Adapting the System to Your Voice B E 3 7 DOWN Push the ENTER switch to select Displaying user guide 5 Highlight an item using the NISSAN control ler and press the ENTER button You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide which con Available items tains basic instructions and tutorials for several Getting Started voice commands Describes the basics of how to operate the 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument Voice Recognition system panel e Using the Address Book 2 Highlight the Others key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER U aE eg Mieke eek
431. parking brake is applied Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light warns of a low brake fluid level If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied stop the ve hicle and perform the following 1 Check the brake fluid level Add brake fluid as necessary See Brake fluid in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual 2 If the brake fluid level is correct have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer AWARNING Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on Driv ing could be dangerous If you judge it to be safe drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs Otherwise have your vehicle towed because driv ing it could be dangerous Pressing the brake pedal with the en gine stopped and or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine Is running it may indicate the charging system is not func tioning properly Turn the engine off and check the generator belt If the belt is loose broken missing or if the light remains on see a NISSAN
432. pausing between words Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition press and release the 4 button located on the steering wheel After the tone sounds speak a command The command given is picked up by the micro phone and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again say Help and the system will repeat them fa command is not recognized the system announces Command not recognized Please try again Repeat the command in a clear voice If you want to go back to the previous com mand you can say Go back or Correc tion any time the system is waiting for a response You can cancel a command when the sys tem is waiting for a response by saying Cancel or Quit The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session You can also press the M2R button on the steering wheel at any time Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback press the volume control switches or on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback You can also use the radio volume control knob In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the f amp button on the steering wheel To speed the operation you can say multiple commands
433. pecified on the Tire and Loading Information label See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa tion section of this manual For detailed information see Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre vent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip pery surfaces Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down De press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will oper ate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles A WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping distances Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 6 MPH 5 10 km h The speed varies according to road conditions When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from unde
434. pen This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Exhaust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual FUEL FILLER DOOR r Z a LPD0391 FUEL FILLER CAP The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove To tighten turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling For additional information see Fuel recommen dation and Flexible fuel vehicle FFV fuel rec ommendation in the Technical and consumer information section later in this manual AWARNING Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi tions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement It has a built in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis sion control system An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt t
435. per son for convenience 6 Press and release the smart or learn pro gram button located on the garage door opener s motor to activate the training mode This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor If the wire originates from under a light lens you will need to remove the lens to access the program button NOTE Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open er s motor and the training light is lit you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7 Use the help of a second person for conve nience to assist when performing this step 7 Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas ing the garage door opener s program but ton quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink button you ve just programmed Press and release the HomeLink button up to 3 times to complete the training 8 Your HomeLink button should now be pro grammed To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers follow steps 2 4 only NOTE Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to clear all previously programmed HomeLink buttons If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992 D O C regulations required hand held transmitter
436. perating position This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories START This position starts the engine As soon as the engine has started release the ignition switch immediately It will automatically return to the ON position The ignition switch cannot be turned back to the LOCK position unless the shift selector is in the P Park position It can be turned only to the position A CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended pe riod This can discharge the battery AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The ignition lock is designed so the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position and the key cannot be removed until the shift selector is moved to the P Park position When removing the key from the ignition switch make sure the shift selector is in the P Park position If the shift selector is not returned to P Park position the ignition switch cannot be moved to the LOCK position To remove the key from the ignition switch 1 Shift the shift selector to the P Park position with the ignition switch in the ON position 2 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion 3 Remove the key from the ignition switch If the shift selector is shifted to the P Park position after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot be turned to t
437. precau tions which should be closely observed AWARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface ap ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving Move the shift selector to P Park Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs If you must work with the engine run ning keep your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehicle e Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with an auto matic engine cooling fan It may come on at any time without warning even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running To avoid injury always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan If you must run the engine in an en closed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack If it is neces sary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery On gasoline engine models the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fu
438. press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds After cranking the engine release the accel erator pedal Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turn ing the ignition key to START Release the key when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure A CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again otherwise the starter could be damaged 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec onds after starting Do not race the engine while warming it up Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first especially in cold weather In cold weather keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start DRIVING THE VEHICLE ENGINE PROTECTION MODE The engine has an engine protection mode to reduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem perature becomes too high for example when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer When the engine temperature reaches a certain level The engine coolant temperature gauge will move toward the H position Engine power may be reduced The air conditioning cooling function may b
439. previous display cancel Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 3 If you press the BACK button during setup the setup will be canceled and or the display will return to the previous screen Finish setup In some screens pressing the BACK button accepts the changes made during setup Settings gt Audio OOOO PY Bass C NDO00 Treble C MN i Balance n Fade n Percision Phased Audio _ oN Down GEnhaces stereo imaging and sound HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis play screen in menus Whenever a menu selec tion is made or menu item is highlighted different areas on the screen provide you with important information See the following for details 1 Header Shows the path used to get to the current screen for example press the SETTING button gt then select the Audio key 2 Menu Selections Shows the options to choose within that menu screen for example Bass etc 4 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 3 UP DOWN Movement Indicator Shows that the NISSAN controller may be used to move UP DOWN on the screen and select more options 4 Screen Count Shows the number of menu selections avail able for that screen for example 5 6 5 Footer Information Line Provides more information if available about the menu selection currently high lighted for example Enh
440. pro vided by the system When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin press the amp 4 button The SA mode will be explained Follow the instructions provided by the system When training is finished the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded The system will ask you to say your name Follow the instructions to register your name The system will announce that speaker ad aptation has been completed and the sys tem is ready The SA mode will stop if The l buttonis pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode The vehicle begins moving during SA mode The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or LOCK position Training phrases During the SA mode the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases The system will prompt you for each phrase phone book new entry dial three oh four two nine delete call back number setup pair phone memo pad play eight pause nine three two pause seven delete all entries call seven two four zero nine phone book delete entry memo pad record dial star two one seven oh Yes No select ring tone dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on setup change priority call three one nine oh two nine seven pause pause three oh eight Cancel call back number call star two zero nine five delete phone dial eight three zero five one Home four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number phone book li
441. pvaloentenayercrse yan 2 57 HomeLink universal transceiver if so equipped 2 58 Programming MOmMeLINK s cxc0sscseee sees eed ew 2 58 Programming HomeLink for Canadian CUStOMOrS t4en40ci7 Getuaneaumeveaseus EA ais 2 59 Operating the HomeLink universal MANSCEIVEN cerren eiei nate wted eet E L Sane 2 60 Programming trouble diagnosis 4 2 60 Clearing the programmed information 2 60 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 2 60 If your vehicle is stolen 0 0005 2 60 INSTRUMENT PANEL 181716 15 27 25 22 20 26 2 2 Instruments and controls 12 13 14 15 Vents P 4 35 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn signal switch P 2 30 Instrument brightness control P 2 33 Steering wheel switch for audio control hands free Bluetooth phone if so equipped P 4 73 Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 53 P 2 34 Meters gauges and warning indicator lights P 2 4 2 13 Cruise control main set switches P 5 18 Windshield wiper washer switch and rear window wiper washer switch P 2 28 P 2 29 Ignition switch P 5 9 Display screen Display screen with navigation system if so equipped P 4 2 P 4 17 Navigation system controls if so equipped P 4 17 Audio system controls P 4 39 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 53 Glove box P 2 41 Hazard l
442. r handle ae aaa WPD0362 Silencing the horn beep feature If desired the horn beep feature can be deacti vated using the keyfob NOTE If you change the horn beep and light flash feature with the keyfob the display screen if so equipped will not show the current mode and cannot be used to change the mode Use the keyfob to return to the pre vious mode and re enable the display screen control To deactivate Press and hold the and B buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See the troubleshooting guide that follows and Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Pre drivi
443. r in this section for Wet brakes Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward backward or sideways you could be injured Whenever you drive off road through sand mud or water as deep as the wheel hub more frequent maintenance may be required See Periodic mainte nance in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide IGNITION SWITCH AWARNING Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving The steer ing wheel will lock This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while driving The steer ing wheel will lock This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY if so equipped The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK until the shift selector is moved to the P Park position When turning the ignition switch make sure the shift selector is in the P Park position If the shift selector is not returned to the P Park position the ignition switch cannot be moved toward LOCK Starting and driving 5 9 When the ignition switch cannot be turned to ward the LOCK position when the Intelligent Key is in range proceed as follows 1 Move the shift selector into the
444. r patents issued or pend ing Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trade marks of Gracenote CD CF CompactFlash CARE AND CLEANING CD Handle a CD by its edges Do not bend the disc Never touch the surface of the disc Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 71 Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use A new disc may be rough on the inner and Do not store the cards in highly humid loca tions Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated Do not spill any liquids on the cards Refer to the CompactFlash card Owner s Manual for more details CF cards A CAUTION Do not force the CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash player slot Forcing the CF card could damage the pins inside the CF player slot especially if the CF card is upside down or backwards Never touch the terminal portion of the Com pactFla
445. r pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 4 Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible 5 Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle 6 Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual DRINKING ALCOHOL DRUGS AND DRIVING AWARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs Alcohol in the bloodstream re duces coordination delays reaction time and impairs judgement Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others Additionally if you are injured in an accident alcohol can increase the severity of the injury NISSAN is committed to safe driving However you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents Al though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol Remember drinking and driving don t mix And that is true for drugs too over the counter pre scription and illegal drugs Don t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco hol drugs or some other physical condition DRIVING
446. r s Manual for information regarding this item GPS Satellite Info Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 25 Settings G Adjust tone and advanced audio settings HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed the SET TINGS screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and modes that are available for your vehicle Use the NISSAN controller to select each item to be set and press the ENTER button Display Display settings Select the Display key and press the ENTER button The Display settings screen will appear 4 26 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Brightness contrast Select the Brightness key or the Contrast key to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map background Use the NISSAN controller to adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the con trast to lower or higher The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Push DAY NIGHT button to resume display Display off Select the Display ON key The indicator of the Display ON turns amber and the message above will be displayed briefly When the audio HVAC Heater and air conditioner or any mode button on the control pan
447. r the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re quired while driving Self test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydraulic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake Starting and driving 5 29 pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the computer senses a malfunc tion it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer 5 30 Starting and driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve hicle motion Under certain situations the system will control braking and engine output to help keep the vehicle on its steered path When the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system is operating the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks If the slip i
448. r traffic which could increase the chance of a col lision Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of the road ina safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se rious damage to the engine almost imme diately Such damage is not covered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so 5 14 Starting and driving AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AWARNING e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P Park or N Neu tral to R Reverse or L Low Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident Cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up Never shift to P Park or R Reverse while the vehicle is moving This could cause an accident A CAUTION When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the vehicle by de pressing the accelerator pedal The foot brake should be used for this purpose Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of control The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled t
449. r windows 2 52 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Wiper Rear window wiper and washer SWICHES ys s s so hehe we Owe a 2 29 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Wiper blades 2 8 19 10 7 GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 A CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door label can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE FFV FUEL RECOMMENDATION if so equipped If your vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuel vehicle FFV your vehicle is designed to use E 85 Fuel Ethanol Regular unleaded regular g
450. radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO Y RN AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Compact disc CD player A CAUTION e Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot This could damage the CD and or CD changer player Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and or CD changer Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD player sometimes cannot func tion when the compartment tempera ture is extremely high or low Decrease increase the temperature before use Do not expose the CD to direct sun light CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty scratched or covered with finger prints may not work properly The following CDs may not work prop erly Copy control compact discs CCCD Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc tion 3 1 in 8 cm
451. rance tire chain clearance speedometer calibration headlight aim and bumper height Some of these effects may lead to acci dents and could result in serious per sonal injury If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires install the new tires on the rear axle Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an acci dent and personal injury If the wheels are changed for any rea son always replace with wheels which have the same off set dimension Wheels of a different off set could cause premature tire wear degrade ve hicle handling characteristics affect the VDC system and or interference with the brake discs drums Such inter ference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and or early brake pad shoe wear Refer to Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off set dimensions When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS e
452. ranklin TN 37068 5003 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre driving checks and adjustments Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical and consumer information na 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags seat belts and child restraints 0 2 Exterior front ak ene bes ceedee eee vbw obenddverweoeca et 0 3 Exterior Cal rsi raean ecce vie aded cdulwaeeeee couedenne 0 4 Passenger compartment 00 cee eee ees 0 5 INSUUMCNE DANClersc4ucenaeveeee ced eeeeceetseaee ede 0 6 Engine compartment check locations 0 8 Warning indicator lights lt c 0s2 ssiaeeeniaee sede ew es 0 9 AIR BAGS SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS 0 2 Illustrated table of contents 3rd row bench seat belts P 1 21 2nd row seat belts P 1 21 Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag P 1 53 Front seat belts P 1 21 Head Restraints P 1 8 Supplemental front impact air bags P 1 53 Seats P 1 2 Occupant classification sensor pressure sensor P 1 61 Seat be
453. rding GVWR and GAWR refer to Vehicle loading information in the Technical and con sumer information section later in this manual 2 50 Instruments and controls The crossbars can be adjusted forward and backward Loosen the thumbwheel 1 and ad just the crossbar to the desired position Tighten the thumbwheel Place your luggage on the bars and secure the luggage with rope to the utility loops Do not place luggage on the side rails or tie rope directly to the side rails Always be sure the thumbwheels are fully tightened to keep the crossbar in place Do not use utility loops for any purpose other than securing luggage WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS AWARNING Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window Unattended chil dren could become involved in serious accidents The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the driver s or passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the windows is canceled oP ol D Window lock button Power door lock switch Front pa
454. re that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve hicles If any driveability problems such as engine stall ing and difficult hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate blend fuels immediately change to a non oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE Technical and consumer information 9 3 Take care not to spill gasoline during refu eling Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage E 85 fuel E 85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Do not use E 85 in your vehicle U S government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be Identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives for example fuel injec tor cleaner octane booster intake valve deposit removers etc which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent heavy spark knock Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise If se vere this can lead to engine damage If you 9 4 Tec
455. reason while the vehicle is in N Neutral or any D Drive position the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position Move the shift selector to the P Park position then the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK P Park A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the P Park shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift selector from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the shift selector into the P Park position R Reverse A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the R Reverse position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P Park N Neutral or any drive position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving 4 Fourth gear Use this positio
456. ree Phone System The system announces the names of the phones already paired with the system and their priority level The system then gives you the option to delete a specific phone all phones or listen to the list again Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones the system asks you to confirm this action NOTE When you delete a phone the associated phone book for that phone will also be deleted Select ringtone Use the Select Ringtone command to select the tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is received The system announces the name of the active phone and asks you to choose from the following commands Ringtone The system plays a ringtone and asks if you would like to select that tone If you say No the system plays the next ringtone available and continues to cycle through the ringtones until you select one or quit Silent The system asks you to confirm your wish to disable the ringtone Bluetooth off Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System When the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone Sys tem is off you will not be able to make or receive calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition Also you will not have access to the Phone Book You can still use the Memo Pad and access Setup SPEAKER ADAPTATION SA MODE Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out of dialect users to train the system to improve rec o
457. retensioner Satellite sensors Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag modules NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System front seats This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U S regu lations It is also permitted in Canada However all of the information cautions and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The driver supplemental front impact air bag Is located in the center of the steering wheel The passenger supplemental front impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions although they may in flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper front air bag system opera tion The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage inflators It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor the Air bag Control Unit ACU seat belt buckle sensors occupant clas sification sensor pressure sensor and passen ger seat belt tension sensor Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver For the front passenger it additionally monitors the weight of an
458. riving checks and adjustments section or Comfort amp Convenience settings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section Confirm that the gt indicator light comes on The light stays on for about 30 seconds The vehicle security system is now pre armed After about 30 seconds the ve hicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase The cE light begins to flash once every 3 seconds If during the 30 second pre arm time period the driver s door is unlocked by the key a request switch the keyfob or Intelligent Key or if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position the system will not arm If the key is turned slowly when locking the driver s door the system may not arm Furthermore if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key the system may be disarmed when the key is removed If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds unlock the door once and lock it again Even when the driver and or passen gers are in the vehicle the system will arm with all doors closed and locked with the ignition switch placed in the OFF position Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently The alarm automatically turns off after ap proximately 50 seconds However the alarm reactivate
459. rmation on how to operate the NISSAN controller see How to use the NISSAN controller earlier in this section Switch to DVD AUX Switch the output source from the DVD drive to another device connected to the auxiliary input jacks located on the DVD player 4 84 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems DVD gt Settings N 10Key Search E te ie eee Title Search Menu Skip DVD Language Maat ae 9 13 For more information see DVD auxiliary input jacks later in this section Menu Some menus specific to each DVD will be shown For details see the instructions attached to the DVD Top Menu Each title menu in the disc will be shown For details see the instructions attached to the DVD Audio Some audio tracks specific to each DVD will be shown For details see the instructions attached to the DVD Subtitle Choose the preferred DVD subtitle language by touching the keyorthe gt key Display Mode Choose from the Full Wide Normal or Cinema mode by touching the keyorthe gt key Angle If the DVD contains different angles such as moving images the current image angle can be switched to another one k 1 Choose a different angle by touching the key or the key the angle will change if available Angle Mark When this item is turned on an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen i
460. rning instruments and controls 2 23 10 NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator NISSAN Intelligent Key model 11 Transfer 4LO position indicator E3 y model 12 4WD shift indicator 23 model 13 Shift selector position indicator Door and liftgate open warning This warning illuminates when a door the liftgate or the liftgate glass has been opened when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position Lock warning Intelligent Key model This warning illuminates and a chime sounds if the ignition switch has been in the ACC or ON position and then placed in the OFF position Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the warning and chime will turn off Refer to Shift P warning in this section for additional information Low fuel warning This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small re serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty 2 24 Instruments and controls Low windshield washer fluid warning This warning illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level Add windshield washer fluid as necessary See Window washer fluid in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual No key warning Intelligent Key model This warning illuminates following two conditions 1 When th
461. rning light comes on the 2WD mode may be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H Be especially careful when driving If corre sponding parts are malfunctioning the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted e Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads Driv ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise tire wear and increased fuel consumption If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads inthe AUTO or 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N posi tion with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking PARKING PARKING ON HILLS AWARNING e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P Park Fail ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re sult in an accident Make sure the shift selector has been pushed as far forward as itcan go and ca
462. romptly In addition you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work closely observe the Maintenance precau tions later in this section EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly Also ensure that all latches lock securely Lubricate hinges latches latch pins rollers and links as necessary Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequently Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check headlight aim Road wheel nuts lug nuts When checking the tires make sure no wheel nuts are missing and check for any loose wheel nuts Tighten if necessary Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7 500 miles 12 000 km Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips If neces sary adjust the pressure in all tires includi
463. ront of the icle ve 3 Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action t t Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING AWARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts such as lithium batter ies may contain perchlorate material The following advisory is provided Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Bluetooth 4 gracenote ae BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Visteon and Xanavi Informatics Corporation Gracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote Inc The Gracenote logo and logo type and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote XM Radio requires subscription sold separately after first 90 days Not available in Alaska Hawaii or Guam For more information visit bxw ww xmradio com era
464. rting ssns cnn tendGverndeniarnves 4 121 Giving voice commands 2 000ee 4 121 NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Command WOK vieccscneyd et xeewn came wes 4 130 Using the system ssc ecevdcentetendeac tenes ace 4 137 Speaker Adaptation Function 005 4 139 Troubleshooting guide 2005 4 142 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM AWARNING Positioning of the heating or air condi tioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in or der that full attention may be given to the driving operation e Do not disassemble or modify this sys tem If you do it may result in accidents fire or electrical shock Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality such as a frozen screen or lack of sound Continued use of the system may result in accident fire or electric shock In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware spill liquid on it or notice smoke or smell coming from it stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents fire or electrical shock INFO button P 4 5 1 NISSAN controller P 4 3 STATUS button P 4 4 brightness control button SETTING button P 4 9 BACK previous button P 4 3 o gt 2 ol 2 3 brightness control button 4 _ d OFF brightness control button P 4
465. rty YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT TED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio late these restrictions If your license terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name The Gracenote MusiclD Service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusiclD ser vice to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote MusiclD Service The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or warran ties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote
466. rvals are followed Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature Because of this it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper ated before the next oil change Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high quality genuine NISSAN oil filter When re placing use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes r
467. rward button while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed buttons When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the CD button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play ing the tape or radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play TUNE FLDR Folder knob While playing an MP3 WMA CD turn the TUNE FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or backward through available folders CD select buttons To play another CD that has been loaded press a CD select button 1 6 RPT button When the RPT button is pressed while the com pact disc is played the play pattern can be changed as follows CD ALL DISC RPT 1 DISC RPT 1 TRK RPT ALL DISC RPT MP3 WMA CD ALL DISC RPT 1 DISC RPT 1 FOLDER RPT 1 TRK RPT ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT All discs loaded will be repeated 1 DISC RPT The disc that is currently playing will be repeated Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 51 1 TRK RPT The track that is currently playing will be repeated 1 FOLDER RPT The folder that is currently being accessed will be repeated RDM button When the RDM button is pressed while the co
468. s do not at tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2 wheel dynamometer such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unex pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or per sonal injury Accelerating quickly sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control If at all possible avoid sharp turning maneuvers particularly at high speeds Your NISSAN four wheel drive vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car The vehicle is not de signed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger Cars Always use tires of the same type size brand construction bias bias belted or radial and tread pattern on all four wheels Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully Be sure to check the brakes immedi ately after driving in mud or water See Brake system late
469. s such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other foreign sub stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water Inside flanges seams and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be cleaned regularly Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance Polishing is recommended to remove built up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re applying wax A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash ing Follow the instructions supplied with the wax Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compounding or aggressive polishing ona base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN
470. s appear Hi Seat belt warning light and r chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver s seat belt is fastened At the same time the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger s seat is occupied For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger Refer to Seat belts in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage 2 18 Instruments and controls ar Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warn ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag front seat mounted side impact air bag roof mounted curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermi
471. s if the vehicle is tampered with again The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver s door with the key a request switch or by pressing the button on the keyfob or Intelligent Key The alarm is activated by opening a door without using the key a request switch keyfob or Intelligent Key even if the door is unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver s door with the key pressing the 1 button on the keyfob or Intelligent Key or by unlocking all doors with any request switch Intelligent Key models NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following pro cedures 1 Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa r
472. s show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys tem Air bag system for the front passen ger See Supplemental restraint system later in this section INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint NISSAN recom mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu facturer s instructions for installation and use SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg can be placed in a forward facing child restraint Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations NISSAN recom mends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use 1 31 LARGER CHILDREN Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided The seat belt may
473. s to stop transmitting after 2 sec onds To program your hand held transmitter to HomeLink continue to press and hold the HomeLink button see steps 2 4 under Pro gramming HomeLink while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly indicating successful programming Instruments and controls 2 59 NOTE When programming a garage door opener etc it is advised to unplug the device dur ing the cycling process to prevent pos sible damage to the garage door opener components OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver once pro grammed may now be used to activate the ga rage door etc To operate simply press the ap propriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries position the hand held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption 2 60 Instruments and controls position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Hold the transmitter
474. seat belt should not use an extender Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints If the child restraint is not secured properly the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud den stop SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE e To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry 1 30 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work properly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the webbing is found the entire seat belt as sembly should be replaced CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained In addition to the general information in this manual child safety information is available from many other sources including doctors teachers government traffic safety offices and community organizations Every child is different so be sure to
475. seated a suitable dis tance away from the steering wheel instrument panel and door finishers See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 53 Sit upright and well back AWARNING The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower severity fron tal collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front air bags inflate with great force Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys tem if you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of posi tion in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You m
476. sh cards Do not bend the cards e Always place the cards in the storage case when they are not being used Do not place heavy objects on the cards 4 72 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems ys 5 Type A Volume control switch MODE select switch POWER on off switch Tuning switch WHA0611 WHA0612 Type B Volume control switch Phone operation switch POWER on and MODE select switch 4 Tuning switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel 0 N gt POWER on off switch If you have the Type A switch with the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON position push the POWER switch to turn the audio system on or off If you have the Type B switch with the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON position push the MODE switch to turn the audio system on MODE select switch Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the following sequence PRESET A PRE SET B PRESET C Music Box if so equipped CD CompactFlash if so equipped DVD if so equipped AUX These modes are only available when compat ible media storage is inserted into the device This mode is only available when music has been downloaded into the Music Box hard disk drive audio system This mode is only available when a compatible auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack Volu
477. sn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed Doing so could result in serious injury IN CABIN MICROFILTER The in cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors The filter is located behind the glove box Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 To replace the filter perform the following proce dure 1 Remove the 2 lower glove box screws 2 Open the glove box then remove the three upper glove box screws Remove the glove box assembly from the instrument panel to access the in cabin microfilter cover 8 18 Maintenance and do it yourself p 4 3 Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the filter cover NOTE The filters are marked with air flow arrows The end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle The arrows should face downward 4 Insert the first filter into the housing and slide it over to the right Insert the second filter into the housing 5 Replace the filter cover 6 Install the glove box assembly 7 Fill out the date information on the small replacement label and attach it to the gl
478. so available in the SETTING mode Settings gt Phone 8 0 gt Settings gt Phone 8 es Automatic Hold Phonebook El Hengup e Downloaded Phonebook Use Handset E Use Handset 0 03 eee X L T t TELLE ely Use Vehicle Ringtone Mute l ee elf mute Call in Progress Use Vehicle Ringtone if Delete Cail Logs B Keypad H XXXXXXX AES Delete Call Logs Bluetooth Setup XXXXXXXXXX Foo o H e 76 a Add or edit phonebook entries i Add or manage Bluetooth phones TA ee tps iy ENDING A CALL PHONE SETTING Download All 2 Download all of the contacts registered in To finish the call perform one of the following To set up the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone the Bluetooth cellular phone Availability of procedures System to your preferred settings press the SET this function depends on each cellular Select the Hang up key on the Call in TING button on the instrument panel and select phone The memory downloading procedure Progress display and press the ENTER button the Phone key on the display then press the from the cellular phone also varies according e Push the SF switch on the steering Shree uto to each cellular phone See your cellular phone Owner s Manual for more details wheel Phonebook When the Call in Progress screen is dis See Phonebook earlier in this section for add Delete Downloaded Phonebook played press the PHONE button on the ing editing and deleting a contact
479. ss Vehicle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR month and year of manufacture Vehicle Identification Number VIN etc Review it carefully EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is at tached to the underside of the hood as shown Technical and consumer information 9 11 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label The label is located as shown 9 12 Technical and consumer information AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL ae me following steps to mount the front license plate The air conditioner specification label is affixed to 1 Make holes on the plastic finisher at the the underside of the hood as shown location mark small dimple using a 0 20 in 5 mm drill Apply light pressure to the drill Install the license plate holder using the two screws provided with the holder 2 Mount the license plate using two M6 14mm bolts License plate bolt tightening torque 3 8 4 7 ft lb 5 10 6 37 N m VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION AWARNING it is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehi
480. ss the ENTER button to display the screen to change the main tenance interval Select the Interval key using the NISSAN con troller and press the ENTER button Use the NISSAN controller to change the maintenance interval to accept the changes press the BACK button Resetting the maintenance interval To reset the reminder schedule distance to O mi km select the Reset Distance key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button 4 8 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA0839 Displaying the maintenance notice re minder Select the Interval Reminder ON key and press the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set mainte nance interval The indicator light will illuminate when it is ON The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au tomatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The ignition switch is placed in the ON po sition the next time the vehicle will be driven Settings 42 00 Settings To return to the previous display after the MAIN TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed press the BACK button Dea Display The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays Beeps Beeps each time the key is turned ON until one of the Clock Clock following conditions are met EEA ERR The Reset key is selected 1 6 DOWN e T
481. ssenger side automatic switch Right rear passenger window switch Left rear passenger window switch Driver side automatic switch Driver s side power window switch The driver s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close the front and rear passenger windows To open a window push the switch and hold it down To close a window pull the switch and hold it up To stop the opening or closing function at any time simply release the switch Front passenger s power window switch The passenger s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger s window To open the window push the switch and hold it down To close the window pull the switch up Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed only the driver s side window can be opened or closed Push it again to cancel the window lock function Instruments and controls 2 51 WIC1255 Rear power window switch The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows To open the window push the switch and hold it down Q To close the window pull the switch up 2 52 Instruments and controls of N LIC0410 Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation press the window switch down only driver s side shown to the second detent and release it it need not be held The window auto matically opens all the way To stop the window lift the switch up w
482. st names call eight oh five four one Correction setup change ring tone dial seven four oh one eight setup main menu Delete dial nine seven two six six memo pad delete call seven six three oh one go back call five six two eight zero dial six six four three seven Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 105 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered try the following solutions Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number 1 until the problem is resolved 1 Ensure that the command is valid See List of voice commands earlier in this section 2 Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone 3 Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle 4 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defroster on NOTE If it is too System fails to interpret the command correctly ae noisy to use the phone it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized 5 If more than one command was said at a time try saying the commands separately 6 If the system consistently fails to recognize commands the voice training procedure should be carried out to im prove the recognition response for the speaker See Speaker adaptation SA mode earlier in this sec
483. stem WRS0802 Rear facing rigid mounted step 2 LRS0673 Rear facing step 3 3 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments LRS0674 Rear facing step 4 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt if applicable Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve hicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 39 5 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 2 through 4 REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS 1 40 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNI
484. step 3 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 41 LRS0670 Rear facing step 4 4 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt WRS0762 Rear facing step 5 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt 1 42 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0763 Rear facing step 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 7 Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior
485. straint is loose repeat steps 3 through 6 FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section When installing a child restraint system in the rear center position both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured See Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt in this section eo WRS0699 Forward facing front passenger seat step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a forward facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and there fore must not be used in the front seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental r
486. supplemental restraint system f 1 l t i i i i I i t i 1 SRS Air Bag Warning Labels The warning labels are located on the sur face of the sun visor SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration 1 67 Oy a LRSO100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air light displaying in the instrument panel moni tors the circuits of the supplemental front impact air bag front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner systems The monitored circuits in clude the Air bag Control Unit ACU crash zone sensor satellite sensors rollover sensor occu pant classification sensor front air bag modules side air bag modules curtain and rollover air bag modules pretensioners and all related wiring bag warning When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warn ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning lig
487. sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front the moonroof will immediately open backward When tilting down If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down the moonroof will im mediately tilt up If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re peats opening or tilting up the moonroof keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens the moonroof will fully close gradually Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof A WARNING in an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints e Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing A CAUTION Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening e Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for ward or backward If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroot INTERIOR LIGHT The interior light has a three position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position When the switch is in the ON position 4 the interior lights ill
488. t If the passenger air bag status light will not illu minate even though you believe that the child restraint the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat in which case the air bag is OFF Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool However until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status For example if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system the supplemental air bag warning light AF located in the meter and gauges area on the driver s side of the instrument panel will blink Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 1 63 Other supplemental front impact air bag precautions AWARNING Do not place any objects on the steer ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel Also do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel Such ob jects may become dangerous projec tiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate Im
489. t The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capac ity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 X 150 650 Ibs or 640 340 5 X 70 300 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re duces the available cargo and lug gage load capacity of your vehicle Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Measurement of Weights later in this section Also check tires for proper inflation pres sures See the Tire and Loading Informa tion label LTI0089 Cargo area ceiling tie down hooks SECURING THE LOAD There are tie
490. t protection against injury in an accident Always replace and adjust them prop erly if they have been removed for any reason e If the head restraints are removed for any reason they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop Properly secure all cargo to help pre vent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Folding the front passenger s seatback To fold the front passenger s seatback flat for extra storage length when transporting long items A Move the seat to the rearmost position by pushing the switch backward until the seat comes to a stop Then recline the seatback as far forward as possible using the recline switch Lift up on the latch located on the upper corner of the seatback to release the back of the seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 15 AWARNING If you fold the front passenger s seat back flat forward to carry longer ob jects be sure this cargo is properly se cured and not near an air bag In a crash an inflating air bag might force
491. t be operated with unleaded gasoline There fore avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country state province or district it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis sion control and safety standards vary according to the country state province or district there fore vehicle specifications may differ When any vehicle is to be taken into an other country state province or district and registered its modifications transpor tation and registration are the responsibil ity of the user NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result 9 10 Technical and consumer information VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION A LTI0085 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN PLATE The vehicle identification number VIN plate is attached as shown This number is the identifica tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number The vehicle identification number is located as shown ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown F M V S S C M V S S CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel is affixed as shown This label contains valu able vehicle information such as Gro
492. t belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt WRS0681 Forward facing step 6 6 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point rear seat installation only See In stalling top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor WRS0698 Forward facing step 8 8 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 9 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 8 Saf
493. t belt usage 1 21 Pregnant women saasaa aaa 1 24 Pre tensioner seat belt system 1 66 Rear center seat belt 1 27 Seat belt extenders 1 30 Seat belt maintenance 1 30 Seatbelts 2 00004 1 21 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 29 Three point type with retractor 1 24 Seat belt warning light 2 18 Seatback pockets 04 2 42 Seats Adj stment a s s sa 6 see we am oe Bw a 1 2 Automatic drive positioner 3 36 Front Seals eo guna s eS oe Ge ee we Oe 4 1 2 Heated seats 04 2 35 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 Second row captain s chair adjustment 1 5 Security indicator light 2 19 Security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 9 27 3 4 5 12 Self adjusting brakes 8 22 Service manual order form 9 33 Servicing airconditioner 4 39 Setting Button s s e ss a ee we we we oR 4 9 4 26 Shift lock release aooaa 5 16 Shifting Automatic transmission 5 15 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 29 Side air bag system See supplemental side air bag curtain and rollover air bag systems 1 65 Sonar Front system eo ee ew oom we KO 5 32 Rear system 2 use 2426 48 ao bas 5 31 Spark plug replacement 8 16 Speedometer 00 002 eee 2 5 SRS warning label 1 67
494. t belts help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help pro tect the front occupants Because of this the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the front air bag module during inflation The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational 1 61 Front passenger air bag and status light AWARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con ditions Read this section carefully to learn how it operates Proper use of the seat seat belt and child restraints is nec essary for most effective protection Fail ure to follow all instructions in this manu
495. t button 2 Select the desired FM AM or SAT station band 3 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 4 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 5 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove e Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock 4 58 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Artist and song information If the station broadcasts RDS information the RDS icon is displayed Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing If the radio is already operating it will automati c
496. t to any of the fan speed positions air is discharged from the rear vents at the corresponding speed 4 38 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Rear fan speed control dial Rear airflow mode buttons Rear temperature control dial CONTROLS Fan control dial The fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on and off and controls fan speed Airflow mode buttons The airflow mode buttons select where the air flow is directed from Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows rear passen gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth s ozone layer Special charging equipment and lubricant is re quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi tioner Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system See Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual A NISSAN dealer is able to service your environ mentally friendly air conditioning system AWARNING The air conditioner system contains re frigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner ser vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equ
497. t to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and or damage FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped for passenger s seat Forward and backward Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the lever to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback pull the lever up and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seatback in position The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park position Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT for driver s seat and if so equipped for passenger s seat Operating tips The power seat motor has an auto reset overload protection circuit If the motor stops during operation wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off This will discharge the battery See Automatic drive positioner if so equipped in Pre driving checks and adjustments for auto matic drive positioner
498. ted stop light Rear combination light Tail Stop Backup reversing Turn License plate light See a NISSAN dealer for replacement Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information 8 30 Maintenance and do it yourself PS ae a ee Room map light Front personal lights Step light Puddle lamp Side turn signal light if so equipped High mount stoplight Cargo light License plate light Rear combination light Headlight assembly Fog light Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A B C or D When replacing a bulb first remove the lens lamp and or cover 1 Indicates bulb removal t Indicates bulb installation Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 LDI0364 LDI0385 Personal lights Vanity mirror Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing LDI0389 Room map lights Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself LDI0341 LDI0388 WDI0233 Step light Puddle light Cargo light Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing Use a cloth to protect the housing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 LDI0384 License plate light 8 34 Maintenance and do it yourself Rear combination light WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire see Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual TIRE PRESSURE
499. tem working when starting the vehicle or accelerating but this is normal AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings When a disc brake pad requires replacement it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver s door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi tion a chime sounds when the driver s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on Turn the headlight control switch off before leav ing the vehicle VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer It displays such items as automatic transmission position indicator cruise control system information Intelligent Key operation information if so equipped some indicators and warnings other information For details about the Intelligent Key see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Press the vehicle information display INFO but ton located on the instrument panel to toggle through the following mo
500. tes and seek medical attention e Do not tip the battery Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce bat tery life and in some cases lead to an explosion When working on or near a battery al ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry e Battery posts terminals and related ac cessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash hands after handling Keep battery out of the reach of WDI10224 children 1 Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown Use a cloth to protect the battery case 2 Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening Do not overfill Reinstall the vent caps 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual If the engine does not start by jump starting the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM A CAUTION e Do not ground accessories directly to the ba
501. that object toward a person This could cause severe injury or even death Se cure objects away from the area in which an air bag would inflate See Precautions on supplemental restraint system later in this section Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the front passenger s seat 2 Once the seatback is released it will enable when itis in the fold down position Use Folding the 2nd row captain s chairs if you to fold the front passenger seatback flat of these areas by passengers could re o equipped sudden stop To fold the 2nd row captain s chairs flat for maxi 3 To return the front passenger s seat to a mum cargo hauling seating position lift up on the seatback and push it up to an upright position Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained Q Raise the armrest to the stowed position Remove the 2nd row center console see 2nd row center console in the Instruments and controls section of this Owner s Manual 2 Pull the strap forward located in the center of the seat cushion and fold the seat cush ion toward the front of the vehicle 1 16 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 3 Then lift up on the recline lever to fold the seatback flat forward 4 There is a carpet panel flap that can be The carpet panel flaps provide a level cargo folded toward the back of the vehicle floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded
502. the NISSAN controller and press the EN TER button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 21 Information gt Fuel Economy Rec 8 00 sacx jy Fuel economy record Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key then select the View key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button The average fuel consumption history will be displayed in a graph form along with the average fuel for the previous Reset to Reset period Information gt Tire Pressure 8 00 Tire pressure information To display tire pressure information press the INFO button then select the Tire Pressure key using the NISSAN controller and press the EN TER button Pressure indication in psi on the screen indi cates that the pressure is being measured After a few driving trips the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position 4 22 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s traveling condition and the temperature In case of low tire pressure a message is dis played on the screen LOW PRESSURE Check All Tires AWARNING When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated
503. the automatic transmission P Park po sition will not function and the transfer case is in neutral When parking always make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set Failure to engage the transfer position in 2WD AUTO 4H or 4LO could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly resulting in serious personal injury or property damage The warning light may come on when the ignition switch is ON and the shift selector is placed in the P position while shifting the transfer case be tween 4H and 4LO Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD AUTO 4H or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP warn ing light when the warning light comes on Before shifting the 4WD switch into the 4LO position or out of 4LO in the 4H position move the shift selector into the N position Shift the shift selector into the P position and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is ON and the ATP warning light is OFF This light indicates that the automatic transmis sion parking function is not engaged If the trans fer control is not secured in any drive position while the shift selector is in the P Park position the transmission will disengage and the drive wheels will not lock Brake or O Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on when the
504. the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on 3 When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off A CAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or any simi lar materials If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running HEATED STEERING WHEEL if so equipped LICO421 The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below approximately 68 F 20 C The heated steering wheel switch is located on the front of the center console box Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts The indicator light will come on If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68
505. the system is waiting for a response When you get used to the menus in the system you can talk ahead by saying more than one command at a time For example say Call five five five one two one two or Memo pad record Also when you get used to the system re sponses you can skip ahead to the tone by pressing the 4 button on the steering wheel However if you press the fa button when the system is waiting for a response from you it will end the VR session Call Main Menu Call or Call International Name speak name Number speak digits Redial Call Back Name speak name If you have stored entries in the Phone Book you can dial a number associated with a name and location See Phone book later in this section to learn how to store entries When prompted by the system say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call The system acknowledges the name If there are multiple locations associated with the name the system asks you to choose the loca tion Once you have confirmed the name and location the system begins the call Number speak digits When prompted by the system say the number you wish to call Refer to How to say numbers and Making a call by entering a phone number earlier in this section for more details Redial Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed within the vehicle
506. the tire and also pro vides the tire identification number TIN for safety standard certification The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself 1 P215 65R15 95H 65 t 3 Example 1 Tire size example P215 65R15 95H P The P indicates the tire is de signed for passenger vehicles not all tires have this information Three digit number 215 This num ber gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to side wall edge Two digit number 65 This number known as the aspect ratio gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 5 t 5 WDI0395 R The R stands for radial Two digit number 15 This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches Two or three digit number 95 This number is the tire s load index It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support You may not find this information on all tires be cause it is not required by law H Tire speed rating You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating DOT XX XX XXX XXXX DOT t 1 XX XX t t 2 3 XXX t Example 4 2 TIN Tire Identification Number for a new tire example DOT XX XX XXX XXXX 1 DOT Abbreviation for the Depart ment Of Transportation The symbol can be placed above below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number 2 Two digit code identification
507. the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5 Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row The 2nd row captain s chairs can be tipped for ward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row bench seat To enter the 3rd row 1 raise the armrest so it is parallel to the seatback and in the stowed position then lift up on the seatback latch located on the upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd row captain s chair and fold the seatback forward at an angle over the seat base This will release the back of the seat so it may be tipped forward Then lift up on the lower corner of the seat base and tip the 2nd row captain s chair forward To exit the 3rd row bench seat lift up on the same seatback latch and fold the seatback forward onto the seat base Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward 1 6 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0369 Outboard seats 2ND ROW BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped Reclining To recline the seatback pull up on the lever and lean back The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat back for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park AWARNIN
508. therwise the arms may be dam aged from wind pressure If you wax the surface of the hood be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle A This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation If wax gets into the nozzle remove it with a needle or small pin Rear window wiper blade Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win dow Push the wiper blade in and pivot until the blade becomes free Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm and snap into place Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer Self adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self adjusting brakes The front and rear disc type brakes self adjust every time the brake pedal is applied AWARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators When a brake pad requires re placement a high pitched scraping or screech ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occa sional brake squeak squeal or other noise may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops
509. tion 1 Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored This can be confirmed by using the List Names command See Phone book earlier in this section phone book 2 Replace one of the names being confused with a new name The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the 4 106 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can Bluetooth make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is paired to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connect ing procedure is required Your phone
510. tion performance from Voice Recognition observe the following The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises traffic noise and vi bration sounds etc which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice commands Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Speak in a natural conversational voice with out pausing between words lf the air conditioner is set to Auto the fan speed is automatically lowered so that your commands can be recognized more easily GIVING VOICE COMMANDS 1 Press the 44 switch located on the steering wheel Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 121 Operating tips How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Say a command after the tone Voice com mands cannot be accepted when the icon Sy Voice Recognition m is G Refer to the following examples Commands that are available are always General rule shown on the display and spoken through voice menu prompts Commands other than those that are displayed are not accepted Only single digits O zero to 9 can be used Information When saying the phone number 800 662 amp To exit hold the TALK switch Please follow the prompts given by the sys tem 6200 the system will accept eight hundred in addition to
511. tion regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Infor mation Canada in the Warranty In formation Booklet Care of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed 8 44 Maintenance and do it yourself Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Fuel recommendation without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option 9 3 Flexible fuel vehicle FFV fuel recommendation if so equipped 6065 9 4 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 9 6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations sccnceseruseeceawiwasatecaxaws 9 7 Speca ersero dap ceeenavarean awe emeea ans 9 8 BNOING sceceageesuetsieesseeer ace voce eee eaoes 9 8 Wheels and tireS 00 cece eee eee 9 9 Dimensions and weights 2 22 0 9 9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another COUNTY a2 lt 2socenaceuueeesieseeeneeneeene 9 10 Vehicle identification 0 00 cece ee e
512. tion the two vehicles to bring their bat e Al t E sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover teries near each other ea A ele the vent holes as it may be contaminated and negative to body ground for Wihconesueccd Do not allow the two vehicles to touch example strut mounting bolt engine lift bracket etc not to the battery 2 Apply the parking brake Move the shift se mete a lector to P Park Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems lights heater air condi tioner etc In case of emergency 6 9 PUSH STARTING AWARNING Do not push start this vehicle The three way catalyst may be damaged A CAUTION Automatic transmission models cannot be push started or tow started Attempt ing to do so may cause transmission damage 6 10 Incase of emergency IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS AWARNING Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire To avoid the danger of being scalded never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot When the radiator or coolant reser voir cap is removed pressurized hot water will spurt out possibly causing serious injury Do not open the hood if steam is com ing out If your vehicle is overheating indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading and the illumination of the engine oil pressure engine coolant temperature high indicator light or if you
513. tivates with the curtain and rollover air bags in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers Working with the seat belt retrac tor it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to restrain front seat occupants The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts When a pretensioner activates smoke is re leased and a loud noise may be heard This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly After pretensioner activation load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing if necessary to reduce forces against the chest If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys tem the supplemental air bag warning light A will not come on will flash intermit tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition switch has been placed in the ON or START position In this case the preten sioner system may not function properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Safety Seats seat belts and
514. to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child s height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward facing child restraints be secured to the designated an chor point on the vehicle 1 34 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0364 LATCH system lower anchor locations captain s chairs LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system compatible child restraints This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only 2nd row captain s chairs if so equipped LATCH lower anchor AWARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instr
515. to keep the vehicle clean Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation Check the underbody for accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as possible 7 6 Appearance and care A CAUTION e NEVER remove dirt sand or other de bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface de icing are extremely corrosive They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corro sion which may be required in some areas con sult a NISSAN dealer 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Maintenance requirements 0 ce eee eee ees 8 2 General maintenance 2 0e cece eee eee 8 2 Explanation of general maintenance items 8 2 Maintenance precautionS s s s sasana cece eee eee 8 5 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine cooling system ne5 x este wteslerdas votes boee8 8 7 Checking engine coolant level 005 8 7 Ch
516. to the rest ing position A Stowed position Resting position HEAD RESTRAINTS AWARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against injury in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re moved Failure to follow these instruc tions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision 1 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The illustration shows the seating positions Components equipped with head restraints All of the head restraints are adjustable 1 Head restraint A Indicates the seating position is equipped with 2 Adjustment notches a head restraint 3 Lockkiob 4 Stalks Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 ae LRS0888 LRS0889 Adjustment To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of the seat occupant s ears 1 10 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Ca LRS0890 Removal Use the following procedure to remo
517. ton Voice recognition language and units setting screen will be displayed Voice Recognition For Voice Recognition settings refer to NISSAN Voice Recognition system if so equipped later in this section My Settings gt Language Units 8 00 Back i Select Language 3 2 Select Units Language Units Use the NISSAN controller to select the Lan guage Units key and press the ENTER button Select which setting you want to change using the NISSAN controller and selecting either the Select Language key or the Select Units key by pressing the ENTER button Select Language Select the English key or the Frangais key to change the language shown on the display If you select the Fran ais key French language will be displayed so please use the French Own er s Manual To obtain a French Owner s Manual please see Owner s Manual Service Manual Or der Information in the Technical and consumer information section 8 00 zack ee ee ail Select Units Select the US mi F MPG key or the Metric km C L 100 km key to change the units shown on the display Audio settings For audio settings refer to Audio System later in this section Navigation settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding these set tings Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems
518. tor screen is displayed com pletely When the shift selector is returned to a position other than R Reverse it may take some time until the screen changes Objects on the screen may be distorted until they are completely displayed When the temperature is extremely high or low the screen may not clearly display ob jects This is not a malfunction When strong light directly enters the cam era objects may not be displayed clearly Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper This is not a malfunction The screen may flicker under fluorescent light This is not a malfunction 4 34 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The colors of objects on the RearView Moni tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object When the contrast of objects is low at night pressing the SETTING button may not change the brightness Objects on the monitor may not be clear ina dark place or at night If dirt rain or snow attaches to the camera the RearView Monitor may not display ob jects Clean the camera Do not use alcohol benzine or thinner to clean the camera This will cause discolora tion To clean the camera wipe with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected Do not use body wax on the camera window If body wax
519. ts and puddle lights if so equipped and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle Some settings for the keyfob such as horn beep can be adjusted For vehicles without navigation system refer to Silencing the horn beep feature later in this section For vehicles with navigation system refer to Comfort amp convenience set tings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section later in this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance of approximately 33 ft 10 m from the vehicle The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one vehicle For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs contact a NISSAN dealer The keyfob will not function when the battery is discharged the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft 10 m The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch A CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the keyfob Do not allow the keyfob which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the keyfob 3 8 Pre driving checks and adjustments Do not strike the
520. ttently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Unless checked and repaired the supplemental restraint system air bag system and or the pre tensioners may not function properly For addi tional details see Supplemental restraint sys tem in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag systems and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible INDICATOR LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display later in this section amp e Front passenger air bag status The front passenger air bag status light Af2_ will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used For front passenger air bag status light operation see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual HO High beam indicator light blue This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is
521. ttery terminal Doing so will by pass the variable voltage control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Use electrical accessories with the en gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator The current sensor A is located near the battery along the negative battery cable If you add elec trical accessories to your vehicle be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 DRIVE BELT AWARNING Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt The engine could rotate unexpectedly 1 Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear Cuts fraying or looseness If the belt is in poor condition or is loose have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer 2 Have the belt checked regularly for condi tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Power steering fluid pump Automatic belt tensioner Water pump Cooling fan Air conditioner compressor Crankshaft pulley Generator Po ot SS SS 8 16 Maintenance and do it yourself SPARK PLUGS REPLACING SPARK PLUGS lridium tipped spark plugs It is not necess
522. ture check the tire pres sure for all 4 tires The Tire and Loading Information label also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label is located in the driver s door opening You can also check the pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen The order of the tire pressure figures dis played on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position See Tire pressure information in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section For additional information see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the In case of emergency section AWARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it
523. turned on super high pitch sound and super low pitch sound are empha sized and midrange sound is played naturally 4 48 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by selecting the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the BACK button For information on how to use the NISSAN con troller see How to use the NISSAN controller earlier in this section Clock set For setting the clock see Clock under the Control panel buttons color screen without navigation system heading earlier in this section CD 12 00 PANAO y y oa 123456 2 XxXxxxxmp3 m XXXXXXX 0 28 ALL DISC RPT MP3 ETL 42 x09 mp3 5 J xxxxxx mp3 6 ws XXxxxx mp3 DUET CD MP3 display mode While listening to a CD or an MP3 WMA CD certain text might be able to be displayed when CD encoded with text is being used Depending on how the CD or MP3 WMA CD is encoded the following text might be able to be displayed by selecting the Text key using the NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but ton Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed File displays the name of the file currently playing CD gt Text 12 00 Folder XXXXXXX File XXXXXXX MpP3 Song XXXXXXX Album Artist XXXXXXX XXXXXXX Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name
524. ty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 425 D SAFETY DEFECTS US only If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addi tion to notifying NISSAN If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot be come involved in individual problems be tween you your dealer or NISSAN To contact NHTSA you may call the Ve hicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator
525. ty Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt Always be sure the 3rd row center seat belt connector tongue and connector buckle are at tached Disconnect only when folding down the rear seat To connect the buckle Q Pull out the connector tongue from the re tractor base 2 Pull out the seat belt tongue from the fabric sleeve 3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiver buckle until it clicks The center seat belt connector tongue and re ceiver buckle are indicated by the gt and lt mark The center seat belt connector tongue can be attached only into the rear center seat belt con nector buckle To fasten the seat belt see Fastening the seat belts earlier in this section AWARNING e Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt connector except when folding down the rear seat When attaching the rear center seat belt connector be certain that the seat backs are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured If the rear center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position serious personal injury may result in an accident or sud den stop LRSO242 Front and 2nd row outboard seats Shoulder belt height adjustment front and 2nd row outboard seats The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad justed to the position best for you See Preca
526. u tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section To adjust pull out the adjustment button and move the shoulder belt anchor 2 to the desired position so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Re lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 29 AWARNING e After adjustment release the adjust ment button and try to move the shoul der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effec tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If because of body size or driving position it is not possible to properly fit the lap shoulder belt and fasten it an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts The ex tender adds approximately 8 in 200 mm of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position See a NISSAN dealer for assistance if an extender is required AWARNING Only NISSAN seat belt extenders made by the same company which made the Original equipment seat belts should be used with NISSAN seat belts Adults and children who can use the standard
527. ually inputting the correct time 0 9 Select to change the number in the display Modify Select to change the number at the cursor position gt Select to move the cursor position to the right lt Select to move the cursor position to the left OK Select to accept the changes made and return to the clock setting display After selection settings press the BACK button or any other mode button to accept the changes Settings gt Comfort amp Conv 12 00 Auto Interior Illumination Auto Headlights Sensitivity Ji Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Remote Key Response Horn 1713 DOWN Cabin lighting when unlocking doors UP Comfort amp Convenience settings if so equipped Select the Comfort amp Conv key by using the NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but ton The comfort and convenience option screen will be displayed You can set the following operating conditions by selecting the desired item using the NISSAN controller then pressing the ENTER button The indicator light box at the right of the selected item alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER button is pressed Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 13 Beep Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Intelligent Key Lock Reply 6 13 DOWN Flash lights with remote key lock unlock Auto Inter
528. uc tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious in jury or death of a child or other passen gers in a sudden stop or collision Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration Do not secure a child restraint in the WRS0416 center rear seating position using LRS0748 the LATCH lower anchors The child restraint will not be secured properly LATCH lower anchor location LATCH system lower anchor locations bench seat l LATCH lower anchor location 2nd row bench seat outboard positions only Inspect the lower anchors by insert if so equipped ing your fingers into the lower anchor The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear area Feel to make sure there are no of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is obstructions over the anchors such attached to the seatback to help you locate the as seat belt webbing or seat cushion LATCH lower anchors material The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower an chors are obstructed Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 35 LRS0344 LRS0382 LATCH label locations 2nd row captain s LATCH label locations 2nd row bench if so chairs if so equipped equipped 1 36 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0661 LATCH webbing mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH co
529. udio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement To minimize the amount of prompts spoken by the system in Alternate Command Mode use the Minimize Voice Feedback function To access the Minimize Voice Feedback function press the SETTING button then select the Others key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button Then select the Voice Recognition key us ing the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button 4 138 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Only single digits O zero to 9 can be used When saying the phone number 800 662 6200 the system will accept eight hundred in addition to eight zero zero or eight oh oh 500 700 and 900 are also supported Examples 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone num bers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the system will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the system will then ask for the last four digits
530. uise main switch indicator This indicator illuminates when the cruise control main switch is pushed The indicator turns off when the main switch is pushed again When the cruise main switch indicator illuminates the cruise control system is operational Cruise set switch indicator light The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system If the light blinks while the engine is running it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning prop erly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator NISSAN Intelligent Key model This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power If this indicator illuminates replace the battery with a new one See Battery replacement in the Maintenance and do it yourself section Transfer 4LO position indicator CS model This indicator illuminates when the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position with the ignition switch placed in the ON position If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position and the indicator blinks stop the vehicle drive slowly forward and the indicator will turn on When you shift between 4H and 4LO stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N Neutral position then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the switch while driving You cannot move the transf
531. uld be checked regularly because e Most tires naturally lose air over time Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds Incorrect tire pressure including un der inflation may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling AWARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certifica tion label The vehicle weight ca pacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Do not load your ve hicle beyond this capacity Over loading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life unsafe operat ing conditions due to premature tire failure or unfavorable han dling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident Loading beyond the specified ca pacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components Before taking a long trip or whenever you heavily load your vehicle use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information
532. ultisession disc Extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C and above 158 F 70 C could affect the performance of the hard disk NOTE If the hard drive needs to be replaced due to a malfunction all stored music data will be erased XXXXXX oe 4 XXXXXX a XXXXXX E C E 1 DISC RPT Recording CDs 1 Operate the audio system to play a CD For information on playing CDs see Com pact Disc CD player operation earlier in this section 2 Touch the REC key REC CD appears on the screen NOTE The system starts playing and recording the 1st track on the CD when the REC key is selected E XXXXXXX 4 XXXXXX A Ps mmm o 1 DISC RPT REC CD 1 10 QSTOP _Text_ Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se lected to be recorded to the Music Box hard disk drive The skip fast forward and rewind features are disabled while the CD is recording The recording process can be stopped at any time All tracks that were played before the CD was stopped are stored Individual tracks can be deleted from the hard drive after the CD is recorded The system records faster than it plays Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 63 If the title information of the track being recorded is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD the title is automatically displayed on the screen For title acquisition from the hard disk drive music recognition techno
533. uminate regardless of door posi tion The lights will go off after about 30 minutes unless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Instruments and controls 2 55 When the switch is in the DOOR position the interior lights and puddle lights if so equipped will stay on for about 30 seconds when The doors are unlocked by the keyfob a key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position The driver s door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer Is activated when The driver s door is locked by the keyfob a key or the power door lock switch The ignition switch is placed in the ON po sition When the switch is in the OFF position 3 the interior lights do not illuminate regardless of door position The puddle lights if so equipped come on when any front or rear passenger door is opened The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min utes while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged 2 56 Instruments and controls NOTE The footwell lights if so equipped and door step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are open regardless of the interior light switch position These lights will turn off automatically after about 30 minutes
534. up or down 4 74 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems mMm eh AM FM CD DVD AUX ys J VOL volume control button 7 Infrared headphone transmitter lens MODE select button Avid speaker control button Red transmitters will be visible when NEXT button infrared headphones are on SEEK button Headphone jacks REAR AUDIO CONTROLS Press the REAR CTRL button on the front radio control panel to turn the rear controls on Press the button again to turn the rear controls off Press the i button the headphones symbol illuminates on the front display when the head phones are on Two headphone jacks are pro vided so two rear seat passengers may listen to the audio system privately One or two infrared headphones are included if the vehicle is equipped with the DVD entertain ment system Most portable radio headphones work with the rear audio controls For vehicles equipped with the FM AM SAT radio with compact disc player if the rear passengers turn off the rear speakers and are using head phones they may choose to listen to a different media than the front passengers The rear pas sengers can listen to the radio along with the front passengers or they can listen to a CD VOL volume button The VOL button allows the rear passengers to adjust the headphone volume level The vehicle volume can also be changed if the REAR CTRL is enabled and the rear audio mode is
535. uppercase characters Lowercase Shows lowercase characters Space Inserts a space Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 19 Symbols Shows symbols such as the question mark e Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch Touch and hold the Delete key to delete all of the characters o OK Completes the character input Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen use a dry soft cloth If additional cleaning is necessary use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth Never spray the screen with water or de tergent Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen START UP SCREEN When you place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position the SYSTEM START UP warning is displayed on the screen When you read and agree with the warning press the ENTER button If you do not push the ENTER button you will not be able to use the navigation system To proceed to the next step refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual 1 2 3 Settings gt Comfor amp Conv 8 01 TUP R HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis play screen in menus Whenever a menu selec tion is made or menu item is highlighted different areas on the screen provide you with important information See the following for details 1 Header Shows the path used to get to the current screen
536. ut ee Uae easeet Eaa os 3 32 Rearview mirror if so equipped 005 3 32 Automatic anti glare rearview mirror if so equipped lt 6 o decctoetoddoumenttereesaces 3 32 Outside MIMOS sirsirrirsi rrr trke rinrin Kansai 3 34 Automatic drive positioner if so equipped 3 36 Memory storage function 00 000e 3 36 Entry exit function sctcracuasced Secsceu ues eaceee 3 37 System ONCANON s ss20cudeertceseg eee ewe seeeee 3 38 KEYS A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from If you still have a key your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it 3 1 Two master keys black with transpon der chip and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on one side 2 Valet key black with transponder chip 3 Key number plate 4 Transponder chip A key number plate is supplied with your keys Record the key number and keep it in a safe place such as your wallet not in the vehicle If you lose your keys see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments D 1 Two Intelligent Keys 2 Mechanical keys inside Intelligent Keys 3 Key number plate NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY if so equipped Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle s Intel ligent Key
537. ve the ad justable head restraints 1 Pull the head restraint up to the highest position 2 Push and hold the lock knob 3 Remove the head restraint from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Install and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating posi tion Install 1 Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction The stalk with the adjustment notches 1 must be installed in the hole with the lock button 2 Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down 3 Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front seat Active Head Restraints The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear end collision The movement of the head restraint helps support the occu pant s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear end collisions After the collision the head restraints return to their original position ea Adjust the Active Head
538. veability and automatic transmission durability and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty 4 DEXTRON VI type ATF or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid may also be used 5 Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer 6 For further details see Air conditioner specification label 7 Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer case durability and may damage the transfer case which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty 8 For further details see Changing engine oil 9 For hot climates viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0 C 32 F 10 See your NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil 9 2 Technical and consumer information Recommended Fluids and Lubricants See Fuel recommendations later in this section 1 Engine oil with API Certification Mark 2 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 2 50 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant or equivalent 50 Demineralized or distilled water Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF 3 Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent 4 Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 5 or equivalent DOT 3 NLGI No 2 Lithium Soap base HFC 134a R 134a 6 NISSAN A C System Oil Type S or equivalent 6 Genuine NISSAN Matic D Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF recommended 7 Genuine NISS
539. versal Transceiver Will operate most Radio Frequency RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and se curity systems Is powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batteries are required If the vehi cle s battery is discharged or is discon nected HomeLink will retain all program ming Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed retain the original trans mitter for future programming procedures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information refer to Program ming HomeLink later in this section 2 58 Instruments and controls AWARNING Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re verse features as required by federal safety standards These standards be came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1 1982 A ga rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases the risk of serious injury or death During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close if the transmitter is within range Make sure that people or obje
540. while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery CONSOLE LIGHT The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control PERSONAL LIGHTS MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT The personal lights on the overhead console can To turn the map lights on press the switches To The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three be swiveled 360 degrees To turn on the light turn them off press the switches again position switch To operate push the switch to press the button Press the button again to turn the desired position neve AA CAUNON ON The light is illuminated Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery Normal center position The light illuminates when the lift gate or glass hatch is opened The light turns off when the lift gate or glass hatch is closed OFF The light does not illuminate regardless of lift gate position or lock status instruments and controls 2 57 HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER if so equipped The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink Uni
541. will change to NOTE If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small the dis play just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position may con tinue to be displayed When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momentarily change the display Average fuel economy MPG or L 100 km The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1 3 mi 500 m After a reset or connecting the battery cables the display might show Resetting fuel economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0 Press the INFO button and select the Fuel Economy key then select the Reset key using the NISSAN controller and press the EN TER button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 5 12 00 Information gt Fuel Economy Record 20 10 0 Reset Interval Latest Push BACK for previous screen Fuel economy record Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key then select the View key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button The average fuel consumption history will be displayed in a graph form along with the average fuel for the previous Reset to Reset period Information gt Tire Pressure Push BACK for previous screen Tire pressure i
542. wing capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat ings Example Gross Vehicle Weight GVW as weighed on a scale including passengers cargo and hitch 6 350 Ib 2880 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR from F M V S S C M V S S certification label 7 250 lb 8289 kg Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR from Towing Load Specification chart 15 100 Ib 6849 kg Maximum Trailer towing capacity from Tow ing Load Specification chart 9 100 lb 4128 kg 7 250 Ib 8289 kg 6 350 Ib 2880 kg GVWR GVW 900 Ib 409 kg Available for tongue weight 15 100 Ib 6849 kg GCWR 6 350 Ib 2880 kg GVW 9 123 Ib 4138 kg Capacity available for towing 900 Ib 409 kg Available tongue weight 8 750 Ib 3969 kg Available capacity 10 tongue weight Technical and consumer information 9 19 The available towing capacity may be less than TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION the maximum towing capacity due to the passen ger and cargo load in the vehicle Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be tween 10 15 of the trailer weight or within the wistourpackage 6 500 Ib 6 500 I
543. wn Always make sure both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue are secured when using the seat belt or installing a child restraint Do not use the seat belt or child restraint with only the seat belt tongue attached This could result in serious personal injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 27 Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt When folding down the 3rd row seat the 3rd row center seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position as follows Q Hold the connector tongue so that the seat belt does not retract suddenly when the tongue is released from the connector buckle Release the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool such as a key into the connector buckle Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base CAO Insert the seat belt tongue into the fabric sleeve so it will lay flat Then secure the connector tongue into the retractor base AWARNING e Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt connector except when folding down the rear seat When attaching the rear center seat belt connector be certain that the seat backs are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured If the rear center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position serious personal injury may result in an accident or sud den stop 1 28 Safe
544. y Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine Start the engine Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter Correct as re quired Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level with the dipstick Add engine oil if necessary CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 2 Turn the engine off 3 Place alarge drain pan under the oil filter 4 Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 5 Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag A CAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage 6 Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil 7 Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional 2 3 turn 8 Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter Correct as required 9 Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level Add engine oil if necessary 5 SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID When checking or replacement is required we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing A CAUTION e Use Genuine NISS
545. y discharged As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys contact a NISSAN dealer A CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the Intelligent Key e Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C e Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet e Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli gent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be us
546. y which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage Sway control device Sudden maneuvers wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han dling Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects If you choose to use one contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle hitch trailer and the trailer s brake sys tem Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device Class hitch Class trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2 000 Ib 909 kg Class II hitch Class Il trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3 500 Ib 1 510 kg Class Ill hitch Class Ill trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5 000 Ib 2 272 kg Class IV hitch Class IV trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10 000 Ib 4 545 kg A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5 000 Ib 2 272 kg Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10 000 Ib 4 545 kg maximum weight rating but your ve hicle is
547. your vehicle to lift the vehicle Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change e Use the correct jack up points Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary Never use blocks on or under the jack Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack It may cause the vehicle to move This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack Never run the engine with a wheel s off the ground It may cause the vehicle to move Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc tions 1 Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground NOTE Before jacking up the vehicle make sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the vehicle is lifted up with the ignition switch placed in the ON position the auto leveling suspension will become disabled after 60 seconds To reset the auto leveling suspension cycle the igni tion switch ON OFF one time In case of emergency 6 5 2 Place the

Nissan 2010 Armada Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents